MINI
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Thank you for choosing a MINI.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help
you make full use of the technical features available in your
MINI. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your MINI.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in
the appendix of the printed Owner's Handbook for Vehicle.
Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with
your MINI.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
© 2015 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English X/15, 11 15 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 236.
6 Information
AT A GLANCE
14 Cockpit
18 Onboard monitor
26 Voice activation system
29 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
CONTROLS
34 Opening and closing
50 Adjusting
60 Transporting children safely
64 Driving
79 Displays
96 Lights
101 Safety
117 Driving stability control systems
121 Driving comfort
139 Climate control
146 Interior equipment
148 Digital compass
155 Storage compartments
DRIVING TIPS
162 Things to remember when driving
165 Loading
168 Saving fuel
MOBILITY
178 Refueling
180 Fuel
182 Wheels and tires
193 Engine compartment
195 Engine oil
199 Coolant
201 Maintenance
203 Replacing components
216 Breakdown assistance
221 Care
REFERENCE
228 Technical data
231 Appendix
236 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Information
Using this Owner's
Manual
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Updates made after the editorial deadline can
lead to differences between the printed Own‐
er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐
uals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ MINI Motorer’s Guide App.
Information to updates made after the editorial
deadline can be found in the appendix of the
printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
User's manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment,
and Communication can be obtained as printed
book from the service center.
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and
Communication can also be called up via the
following media:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual on the Control
Display.
▷ MINI Motorer’s Guide App.
Additional sources of in‐
formation
A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer
additional questions at any time.
Internet
Information about MINI, e.g., on technology, is
available on the Internet: www.miniusa.com
MINI Motorer’s Guide app
The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐
tries as an app for iOS or Android in the respec‐
tive Store.
Symbols and displays
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Indicates precautions that must be followed
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of
personal injury and serious damage to the
vehicle.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of
information.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system..
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
Action steps
Action steps to be carried out are presented as
numbered list. The steps must be carried out in
the defined order.
1.
First action step.
2. Second action step.
Enumerations
Enumerations without mandatory order or al‐
ternative possibilities are presented as list with
bullet points.
Seite 6
Information
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
▷ First possibility.
▷ Second possibility.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the
relevant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series.
Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, we also de‐
scribe and illustrate features that are not avail‐
able in your vehicle, for example, because of
the selected optional features or the country-
specific version.
This also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
The respectively applicable country provisions
must be observed when using the respective
features and systems.
For any options and equipment not described
in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supple‐
mentary Owner's Manuals.
On right-hand drive vehicles, some control ele‐
ments are arranged differently from what is
shown in the illustrations.
Status of the Owner's
Manual
Basic information
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
policy of constant development that is con‐
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐
dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
those in your vehicle.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Updates made after the editorial deadline can
lead to differences between the printed Own‐
er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐
uals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ MINI Motorer’s Guide App.
Information to updates made after the editorial
deadline can be found in the appendix of the
printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
Own safety
Manufacturer
The manufacturer of this MINI is Bayerische
Motoren Werke Aktionengesellschaft, BMW AG.
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for the
operating conditions and registration require‐
ments applying in the country of first delivery
also known as homologation. If your vehicle is
to be operated in a different country it might
be necessary to adapt your vehicle to poten‐
tially differing operating conditions and permit
requirements. If your vehicle does not comply
with the homologation requirements in a cer‐
tain country you may not be able to lodge war‐
ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further in‐
formation on warranty is available from a
dealer’s service center.
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics,
requires suitable maintenance and repair work.
Seite 7
Information
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to a
MINI dealer’s service center. If you choose to
use another service facility, the manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends use of a facility that
performs work, e.g. maintenance and repair,
according to MINI specifications with properly
trained personnel, referred to in this Owner's
Manual as "another qualified service center or
repair shop".
If work is performed improperly, e.g. mainte‐
nance and repair, there is a risk of subsequent
damage and related safety risks.
Parts and accessories
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
the use of parts and accessory products ap‐
proved by the manufacturer of the MINI.
Approved parts and accessories, and advice on
their use and installation are available from a
MINI dealer's service center.
MINI parts and accessories were tested by the
manufacturer of the MINI for their safety and
suitability in MINI vehicles.
The manufacturer of your vehicle warrants gen‐
uine MINI parts and accessories.
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not
evaluate whether each individual product from
another manufacturer can be used with MINI
vehicles without presenting a safety hazard,
even if a country-specific official approval was
issued. The manufacturer of your vehicle does
not evaluate whether these products are suita‐
ble for MINI vehicles under all usage conditions.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
bile components and parts, including compo‐
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth de‐
fects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer‐
tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
water.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▷ California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to de‐
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is
operated under those conditions. If you wish to
operate your vehicle in another country or re‐
gion, you may be required to adapt your vehi‐
cle to meet different prevailing operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements. You
should also be aware of any applicable war‐
ranty limitations or exclusions for such country
or region. In such case, please contact Cus‐
tomer Relations for further information.
Seite 8
Information
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
road safety, operational reliability and the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures:
▷ MINI Maintenance system
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in serious
damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not
covered by the MINI New Vehicle Limited War‐
ranty.
Data memory
Many electronic components on your vehicle
are equipped with data memories that tempo‐
rarily or permanently store technical informa‐
tion about the condition of the vehicle, events
and faults. This technical information generally
records the state of a component, a module, a
system or the environment:
▷ Operating mode of system components, fill
levels for instance.
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from its
individual components, e.g., wheel rotation
speed/vehicle speed, deceleration, trans‐
verse acceleration.
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important system
components, e.g., lights and brakes.
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
tions such as airbag deployment or engag‐
ing the stability control system.
▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature.
This data is purely technical in nature and is
used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐
mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over
routes traveled cannot be created from this
data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐
pair services, service processes, warranty
claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐
mation can be read out from the event and
fault memories by employees of a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop, including the manufacturer,
using special diagnostic tools. You can obtain
further information there if you need it. After
an error is corrected, the information in the
fault memory is deleted or overwritten on a
continuous basis.
With the vehicle in use there are situations
where you can associate these technical data
with individuals if combined with other infor‐
mation, e.g., an accident report, damage to the
vehicle, eye witness accounts — possibly with
the assistance of an expert.
Additional functions that are contractually
agreed with the customer - such as vehicle
emergency locating - you can transmit certain
vehicle data from the vehicle.
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
operating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
Seite 9
Information
9
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
These data can help provide a better under‐
standing of the circumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur.
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are re‐
corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐
tions and no personal data, e. g., name, gen‐
der, age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Vehicle identification
number
The vehicle identification number can be found
in the engine compartment.
The vehicle identification number can also be
found behind the windshield.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
NHTSA, in addition to notifying MINI of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or MINI of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe‐
rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.safe‐
rcar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone
the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can
also obtain other information about motor ve‐
hicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsaf‐
ety.
Seite 10
Information
10
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Seite 11
Information
11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
WATCH ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Cockpit
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐
tive features and systems.
All around the steering wheel
1 Power windows 46
2 Exterior mirror operation 57
3 Central locking system 40
4 Lights
Front fog lights 99
Rear fog lights 99
Lights off
Daytime running lights 98
Parking lights 96
Low beams 96
Automatic headlight control 97
Corner-illuminating lights 98
High-beam Assistant 98
Instrument lighting 99
5 Steering wheel buttons, left
Seite 14
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Camera-based cruise control on/
off 121
Cruise control on/off 127
Store speed 121, 127
Pause, continue cruise con‐
trol 121, 127
Set speed 121, 127
Reduce distance 121
Increase distance 121
6 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 70
High beams, head‐
light flasher 70
High-beam Assistant 98
Roadside parking lights 97
On-board computer 88
7 Instrument cluster 79
8 Steering column stalk, right
Windshield wipers 71
Rain sensor 72
Cleaning windows 72
Rear window wiper 73
Cleaning rear window 73
9 Steering wheel buttons, right
Voice activation 26
Telephone
Confirm the selection 88
Move selection up 88
Move selection down 88
Increase volume
Reduce volume
10 Horn
11 Adjust the steering wheel 59
12 Unlock hood 193
Seite 15
Cockpit
AT A GLANCE
15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
All around the center console
1 Hazard warning system 216
Intelligent Safety 110
2 Control Display 18
3 Radio/Multimedia
4 Glove compartment 155
5 Climate control 139
6 PDC Park Distance Control 129
Rearview camera 132
Parking assistant 134
Auto Start/Stop function 66
Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off 64
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 132
Head-up Display 93
7 Steptronic transmission selector lever 75
Manual transmission selector lever 74
8 Controller with buttons 19
9 Parking brake 68
10 Driving Dynamics Control 119
Seite 16
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Onboard monitor
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐
tive features and systems.
The concept
The onboard monitor combines the functions
of a multitude of switches. Thus, these func‐
tions can be operated from a central location.
WARNING
Operating the integrated information sys‐
tem and communication devices while driving
can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose
control of the vehicle. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Only use the systems or devices when the
traffic situation allows. If necessary stop and
use the systems and devices while the vehicle is
stationary.◀
Overview of control ele‐
ments
Control elements
1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons and, depending on
the equipment version, with touchpad
Control Display
Information
▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the care
instructions.
▷ Do not place objects close to the Control
Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
be damaged.
▷ In the case of very high temperatures on
the Control Display, e.g. due to intense so‐
lar radiation, the brightness may be re‐
duced down to complete deactivation.
Once the temperature is reduced, e.g.
through shadow or climate control system,
the normal functions are re-established.
Switching on
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the controller.
Seite 18
AT A GLANCE
Onboard monitor
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Switching off
1.
Press button.
2. "Turn off control display"
Controller with navigation system
The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐
rectly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Some functions of the onboard monitor can be
operated using the touchpad on the controller:
1.
Turn.
2. Press.
3. Move in four directions.
Buttons on controller
Press button Function
MENU Open the main menu.
RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
MEDIA Opens the Multimedia menu.
NAV Opens the Navigation menu.
TEL Opens the phone menu.
BACK Displays the previous display.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Controller without navigation system
The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐
rectly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
1.
Turn.
Seite 19
Onboard monitor
AT A GLANCE
19
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
2. Press.
3. Move in two directions.
Buttons on controller
Press button Function
MENU Open the main menu.
AUDIO Open audio menu last listened to,
switch between audio menus.
TEL Opens the phone menu.
BACK Open previous panel.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Operating concept
Opening the main menu
Press button.
The main menu is displayed.
All onboard monitor functions can be called up
via the main menu.
Selecting menu items
Highlighted menu items can be selected.
1.
Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"Settings".
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
▷ Move the controller to the left.
Closes current display and shows previous
display.
Reopens previous display by pressing BACK
button. In this case, the current panel is not
closed.
Seite 20
AT A GLANCE
Onboard monitor
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
▷ Move the controller to the right.
Opens new display on top of previous
screen.
Arrows pointing to the left or right indicate that
additional panels can be opened.
Opening the Options menu
Press button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Additional options: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is
displayed.
Options menu
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".
▷ Control options for the selected main
menu, e.g., for "Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".
Changing settings
1.
Select a field.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
3. Press the controller.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Touchpad
Some functions of the onboard monitor can be
operated using the touchpad on the controller:
Selecting functions
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Touchpad"
3. Select the desired function.
▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
▷ "Interactive map": viewing the interac‐
tive map.
▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
letters and numbers.
Entering letters and numbers
Entering letters requires some practice at the
beginning. When entering, pay attention to the
following:
Seite 21
Onboard monitor
AT A GLANCE
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
▷ The system distinguishes between upper
and lower-case letters and numbers. For
entries, it may be necessary to change be‐
tween upper and lower-case letters, num‐
bers and characters, refer to page 25.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on
the Control Display.
▷ Always enter associated characters, such as
accents or periods so that the letter can be
clearly recognized. Possible input depends
on the set language. Where necessary, en‐
ter special characters via the controller.
▷ To delete a character, slide to the left on
the touchpad.
▷ To enter a blank space, slide to the right in
the center of the touchpad.
▷ To enter a hyphen, slide to the right in the
upper area of the touchpad.
▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right
in the lower area of the touchpad.
Operating the interactive map
The interactive map in the navigation system
can be moved via the touchpad.
Function Controls
Interactive map. Swipe into respective
direction.
Enlarge/shrink in‐
teractive map.
Drag in or out on the
touchpad with fingers.
Display menu. Tap once.
Changing settings
You may change Control Display settings, for
example the volume, via touchpad. Swipe left
or right accordingly.
Example: setting the
clock
Setting the clock
On the Control Display:
1.
Press button. The main menu is dis‐
played.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
highlighted, and then press the controller.
3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
to display "Time/Date".
4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is
highlighted, and then press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
6. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
Seite 22
AT A GLANCE
Onboard monitor
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Status information
Status field
The following information is displayed in the
status field at the top right:
▷ Time.
▷ Current entertainment source.
▷ Sound output, on/off.
▷ Wireless network reception strength.
▷ Phone status.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception.
Status field symbols
The symbols are grouped as follows:
Radio symbols
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio station is being received.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Wireless network reception strength.
Symbol flashes: network search.
Wireless network is not available.
Bluetooth is switched on.
Roaming is active.
Text message was received.
Check the SIM card.
SIM card is blocked.
Symbol Meaning
SIM card is missing.
Enter PIN.
Entertainment symbols
Symbol Meaning
Music collection.
Gracenote® database.
AUX-IN port.
USB audio interface.
Mobile phone audio interface.
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Spoken instructions are turned off.
Split screen
General information
Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, e.g., information
from the on-board computer.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when you change to another menu.
Switching the split screen on and off
On the Control Display:
1.
Press button.
2. "Split screen"
Seite 23
Onboard monitor
AT A GLANCE
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Selecting the display
On the Control Display:
1.
Press button.
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller until the split screen is
selected.
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen
content".
5. Select the desired menu item.
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The onboard monitor functions can be stored
on the programmable memory buttons and
called up directly, e.g., radio stations, naviga‐
tion destinations, phone numbers and menu
entries.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Saving a function
1.
Highlight function via the onboard monitor.
2.
Press and hold the desired button,
until a signal sounds.
Running a function
Press button.
The function will work immediately. This
means, e.g., that the number is dialed when a
phone number is selected.
Displaying the button assignment
Touch buttons with bare fingers. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
The key assignment is displayed at top edge of
screen.
Deleting the button assignments
1.
Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds.
2. "OK"
Deleting personal in the
vehicle
The concept
Depending on the usage, the vehicle saves per‐
sonal data, such as stored radio stations. These
personal data can be permanently deleted via
the onboard monitor.
General information
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing data can be deleted:
▷ Personal Profile settings.
▷ Stored radio stations.
▷ Stored Favorites buttons.
▷ Travel and on-board computer information.
Seite 24
AT A GLANCE
Onboard monitor
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
▷ Music collection.
▷ Navigation, e.g. stored destinations.
▷ Phone book.
▷ Voice notes
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
to 30 minutes.
Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Deleting data
Heed and follow the instructions on the Control
Display.
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. "Settings"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete all personal data"
5. "Continue"
6. "OK"
Entering letters and
numbers
General information
On the Control Display:
1.
Turn the controller: select letters or num‐
bers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete the letter
or number.
Press the controller for an extended
period: delete all letters or numbers.
Switching between cases, letters and
numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case, letters
and numbers:
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or Tip controller up.
Without navigation system
Select symbol.
Entry comparison
Entering names and addresses: choice is nar‐
rowed down with every letter entered and let‐
ters may be added automatically.
Entries are continuously compared with data
stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during input
for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: place names can be en‐
tered in all languages that are available on
the Control Display.
Seite 25
Onboard monitor
AT A GLANCE
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Voice activation system
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐
tive features and systems.
The concept
▷ Most functions displayed on the Control
Display can be operated by voice com‐
mands via the voice activation system. The
system supports you with announcements
during input.
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary cannot be used via the
voice activation system.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's
Manual to use with the voice activation sys‐
tem.
Requirements
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system
so that the spoken commands can be identi‐
fied.
Set the language, refer to page 92.
Using voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1.
Press button on the steering wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
A command that is recognized by the voice
activation system is announced and dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active.
If no other commands are available, operate
the function via the onboard monitor.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Briefly press the button on the steering
wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
Most menu items on the Control Display can be
voiced as commands.
The available commands depend on the menu
that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
There are short commands for many functions.
You may select lists such as phone lists via
voice activation. Read these lists out loud ex‐
actly as they show in the respective list.
Having possible commands read aloud
You can have available commands read out
loud for you: ›Voice commands‹
E. g. if the "Settings" menu is displayed, the
commands for the settings are read out loud.
Seite 26
AT A GLANCE
Voice activation system
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Executing functions using short
commands
Execute functions on the main menu via short
commands. It almost doesn't matter which
menu item is selected, e.g., ›Vehicle status‹.
Help dialog for the voice activation
system
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹
Additional commands for the help dialog:
▷ ›Help with examples‹: announces informa‐
tion about the current operating options
and the most important commands for
them.
▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information
about the principle of operation for the
voice activation system is announced.
One example: opening the
tone settings
Via the main menu
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the controller.
1.
Turn on the Entertainment sound output if
needed.
2.
Press button on the steering wheel.
3. ›Radio‹
4. ›Tone‹
Via short command
The desired tone settings can also be started
via a short command.
1.
Turn on the Entertainment sound output if
needed.
2.
Press button on the steering wheel.
3. ›Tone‹
Setting the voice dialog
Set system to standard dialog or use a short
version.
The short version of the voice dialog plays back
short messages in abbreviated form.
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech type:"
4. Select setting.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the profile cur‐
rently used.
Information on Emer‐
gency Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establishment
of a phone connection.
Environmental condi‐
tions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
Seite 27
Voice activation system
AT A GLANCE
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Seite 28
AT A GLANCE
Voice activation system
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Integrated Owner's Manual in the
vehicle
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐
tive features and systems.
Integrated Owner's
Manual in the vehicle
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played on the Control Display. It specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the ve‐
hicle.
Components of the Integrated Owner's
Manual
The Integrated Owner's Manual consists of
three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐
mation or possible access.
Quick Reference Guide
The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐
tion how to operate the car, how to use basic
vehicle functions or what to do in case of a
breakdown. This information can also be dis‐
played while driving.
Search by images
Image search provides information and de‐
scriptions. This is helpful when the terminology
for a feature is not at hand.
Owner's Manual
Search for information and descriptions by en‐
tering terms selected from the index.
Select components
1.
Press button.
2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle
info".
3. Press the controller.
4. Selecting desired range:
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Leafing through the Owner's Manual
Page by page with link access
Turn the controller until the next or previous
page is displayed.
Page by page without link access
Scroll through the pages directly while skipping
the links.
Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press
the controller to browse from page to page.
Scroll back.
Seite 29
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
AT A GLANCE
29
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Scroll forward.
Context help - Owner's Manual to the
temporarily selected function
You may open the relevant information di‐
rectly.
Opening via the onboard monitor
To move directly from the application on the
Control Display to the options menu:
1.
Press button or move the controller to
the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on the
Control Display:
"Display Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the
Owner's Manual
To switch from a function, e. g., radio, to the
Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to
alternate between the two displays:
1.
Press button or move the controller to
the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4.
Press button again to return to last
displayed function.
5.
Press button to return to the page of
the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate permanently between the last dis‐
played function and the Owner's Manual re‐
peat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every
time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The Owner's Manual can be stored on the Pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly.
Storing
1.
Select "Owner's Manual" via the onboard
monitor.
2.
Press and hold the desired button,
until a signal sounds.
Executing
Press button.
The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐
mediately.
Seite 30
AT A GLANCE
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Seite 31
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
AT A GLANCE
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
HANDLE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐
tive features and systems.
Remote control/key
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐
trols with integrated key.
Every remote control holds a replaceable bat‐
tery.
You may set the key functions depending on
the optional features and country-specific ver‐
sion. For Settings, refer to page 43.
The vehicle stores personal settings for every
remote control. Personal Profile, refer to
page 36.
The remote controls hold information on re‐
quired maintenance. Service data in the remote
control, refer to page 201
Overview
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Open split doors
4 Panic mode
Integrated key
Press button, arrow 1, and remove the key, ar‐
row 2.
The integrated key fits the driver's door lock.
Replacing the battery
1.
Remove integrated key from remote con‐
trol.
2. Slide the key into the opening and raise the
cover.
Seite 34
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
The battery compartment is accessible.
3. Slide the key in the cover of the battery
compartment and raise the cover.
4. Insert a battery of the same type with the
positive side facing up.
5. Insert lid and cover.
6. Push key into the remote control until it en‐
gages.
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop or
take them to a collection point.
New remote controls
New remote controls are available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Loss of the remote controls
The lost remote control can be blocked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Emergency detection of remote control
It is possible to switch on the ignition or start
the engine in situations such as the following:
▷ Interference of radio transmission to re‐
mote control by external sources e.g., by
radio masts.
▷ Empty battery in remote control.
▷ Interference from radio transmissions
through mobile devices in close proximity
to remote control.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a
charging process of a mobile device, for ex‐
ample charging of a mobile phone.
A Check Control message is displayed if an at‐
tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start
the engine.
Starting the engine via emergency
detection of the remote control
Steptronic transmission: if a corresponding
Check Control message appears, hold the re‐
mote control, as shown, against the marked
area on the steering column and press the
Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while
pressing the brake.
Manual transmission: if a corresponding Check
Control message appears, hold the remote con‐
trol, as shown, against the marked area on the
steering column and press the Start/Stop but‐
ton within 10 seconds while pressing the
clutch.
Seite 35
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Personal Profile
The concept
Using Personal Profile, individual settings for
several drivers can be saved and called up
again at a later time.
General information
There are three profiles with which personal ve‐
hicle settings can be stored. Every remote con‐
trol has one of these profiles assigned.
If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐
trol, the assigned personal profile will be acti‐
vated. All settings stored in the profile are auto‐
matically applied.
If several drivers use their own remote control,
the vehicle will adjust the personal settings dur‐
ing unlocking. These settings are also restored,
if the vehicle has been used in the meantime
by a person with a different remote control.
Changes to the settings are automatically saved
in the profile currently activated.
If another profile is selected via the onboard
monitor, the settings saved in it will be applied
automatically. The new profile is assigned to
the remote control currently used.
There is an additional profile available that is
not assigned to any remote control: It can be
used to apply settings in the vehicle without
changing the personal profiles.
Adjusting
The settings for the following systems and func‐
tions are saved in the active profile. The scope
of storable settings is country- and equipment-
dependable.
▷ Unlocking and locking.
▷ Lights.
▷ Radio.
▷ Instrument cluster.
▷ Programmable memory buttons.
▷ Volumes, tone.
▷ Control Display.
▷ Climate control.
▷ Navigation.
▷ Park Distance Control PDC.
▷ Rearview camera
▷ Head-up Display.
▷ Driving Dynamics Control.
▷ Intelligent Safety.
Profile management
Opening profiles
Regardless of the remote control in use a differ‐
ent profile may be activated.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Select a profile.
The following functions are executed:
▷ All settings stored in the called-up profile
are automatically applied.
▷ The called-up profile is assigned to the re‐
mote control being used at the time.
▷ If the profile is already assigned to a differ‐
ent remote control, this profile will apply to
both remote controls. It cannot be differen‐
tiated anymore between the settings for
the two remote controls.
Renaming profiles
A personal name can be assigned to every pro‐
file to avoid confusion between the profiles.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
The current profile is selected.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Rename current profile"
Seite 36
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Resetting profiles
The settings of the active profile are reset to
their default values.
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
The current profile is selected.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Reset current profile"
Exporting profiles
Most settings of the active profile can be ex‐
ported.
This can be helpful for securing and retrieving
personal settings, before delivering the vehicle
to a workshop, for example. Profiles can be
taken to another vehicle equipped with the
Personal Profile function.
Export is made via the USB port to a USB de‐
vice.
Popular file systems for USB devices are sup‐
ported. FAT32 and exFAT are the recom‐
mended formats for profile export. Other for‐
mats may not support the export.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Export profile"
4. "USB device"
Importing profiles
Profiles stored on a USB device can be im‐
ported via the USB interface.
Existing settings are overwritten with the im‐
ported profile.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Import profile"
4. "USB device"
Using the guest profile
The guest profile is for individual settings that
are saved in none of the three personal profiles.
This can be useful for drivers who are using the
vehicle temporarily and do not have their own
profile.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Guest"
4. Adjust the settings.
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not
assigned to the current remote control.
Display profile list during start
The profile list can be displayed during each
start to select the desired profile.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display user list at startup"
Using the remote con‐
trol
Information
WARNING
People or animals in the vehicle can lock
the doors from the inside and lock themselves
in. The vehicle can then not be opened from
the outside. There is risk of injuries. Take the
remote control along so that the vehicle can be
opened from the outside.◀
Unlocking
Press button on the remote control.
▷ The vehicle is unlocked.
▷ The interior lights are switched on, when it
is dark outside, the courtesy lamps are also
Seite 37
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
switched on. This function is not available, if
the interior lamps were switched off man‐
ually.
▷ The welcome lamps are switched on, if this
function was activated.
You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.
Create the settings, refer to page 43.
The alarm system, refer to page 44, is
switched off.
Convenient opening
Press and hold this button on the re‐
mote control after unlocking.
The windows and the glass sunroof are opened,
as long as the button on the remote control is
pressed.
Locking
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possible
with special knowledge.
If people must spend a longer time in the vehi‐
cle while it is very hot or cold outside, there is
risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock the
vehicle from the outside when there are people
in it.◀
The driver's door must be closed.
Press button on the remote control.
The alarm system, refer to page 44, is
switched on.
If the vehicle horn honks twice when you lock
the car, this means that the engine or ignition is
still switched on. In this case, the engine or ig‐
nition must be switched off by means of the
Start/Stop button.
Switching on interior lights and
courtesy lights
Press button on the remote control
with the vehicle locked.
The courtesy lamps are only switched on when
it is dark outside. This function is not available,
if the interior lamps were switched off man‐
ually.
If the button is pressed within 10 seconds of
when the vehicle was locked Interior motion
sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti-theft
warning system, refer to page 45, are turned
off. After locking, wait 10 seconds before press‐
ing the button again.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press button on the remote control for
at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Opening split doors
When the split doors are opened, make sure
there is sufficient clearance to prevent damage.
1.
Press button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second.
The right side of the split doors opens, re‐
gardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
2.
Press button on the remote control
again for approx. 1 second.
The left side of the split doors opens.
To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on the features and the country
version, it is also possible to have door un‐
locked. Create the settings, refer to page 43.
If the doors were not unlocked, the split doors
are locked again as soon as they close.
CAUTION
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
the rear window and heat conductors while
driving. There is risk of property damage. Cover
Seite 38
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
the edges and ensure that pointed objects do
not hit the rear window.◀
Malfunction
Remote control detection by the vehicle can
among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 34.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmit power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity.
Do not transport the remote control together
with metal objects or electronic devices.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
the vehicle using the integrated key, refer to
page 39.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is governed
by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ LX8766S.
▷ LX8766E.
▷ LX8CAS.
▷ LX8CAS2.
▷ MYTCAS4.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐
ence, and
▷ this device must accept any interference re‐
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Without remote control
From the outside
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possible
with special knowledge.
If people must spend a longer time in the vehi‐
cle while it is very hot or cold outside, there is
risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock the
vehicle from the outside when there are people
in it.◀
CAUTION
The door lock is permanently joined with
the door. The door handle can be moved.
When pulling the door handle with the
integrated key inserted, paint or key can be
damaged. There is risk of property damage. Re‐
move the integrated key before pulling the
outside door handle.◀
Unlock or lock the driver's door via the door
lock using the integrated key, refer to page 34.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked
from the inside.
1.
Remove lid on the door lock.
Seite 39
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
To do this, slide the integrated key into the
opening from below and remove the lid.
2. Unlock or lock door lock.
Alarm system
The alarm system is not armed if the vehicle is
locked with the integrated key.
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, if the vehicle was unlocked via the
door lock. In order to terminate this alarm, un‐
lock vehicle with the remote control or switch
on the ignition, if needed, through emergency
detection of the remote control, refer to
page 35.
From the inside
Locking and unlocking
Press button.
Vehicle is locked.
Press button.
The vehicle is unlocked.
Pressing the buttons for the central locking sys‐
tem locks and unlocks the doors and the split
doors when the front doors are closed, but they
are not secured against theft.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights come on.
Unlocking and opening
▷ Press the central locking system
button to unlock the doors to‐
gether, and then pull the door handle
above the armrest.
▷ Front doors: pull the door handle on the
door to open the door. The other doors re‐
main locked.
▷ Back doors: pull twice on the door handle
on the door to be opened; the first time un‐
locks the door, the second time opens it.
The other doors remain locked.
Split doors
Information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the split doors. There is risk of injuries.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
split doors is clear during opening and clos‐
ing.◀
CAUTION
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
the rear window and heat conductors while
driving. There is risk of property damage. Cover
the edges and ensure that pointed objects do
not hit the rear window.◀
CAUTION
The split doors swivel back and to the
side when they open. There is risk of property
damage. Make sure that the area of movement
Seite 40
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
of the split doors is clear during opening and
closing.◀
To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Opening from the outside
When the split doors are opened, make sure
there is sufficient clearance to prevent damage.
▷ Unlock the vehicle and use the button in
the handle to completely open first the
right side, arrow 1, and after that the left
side of the split doors, arrow 2.
▷ Press button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second.
As the case may be, the doors are also un‐
locked. Unlocking with the remote control,
refer to page 38.
The right side of the split doors opens.
Press button on the remote control
again for approx. 1 second.
The left side of the split doors opens.
Opening from the inside
With the vehicle is stationary, press the
button in the driver's floor area.
The right split door opens. Press button again
to open the left split door as well.
Closing
To close the split doors, first press the left side,
then the right side.
Comfort Access
The concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote control
with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the
car's interior.
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
▷ Convenient closing.
▷ Open split doors one at a time.
▷ Open split doors with no-touch activation.
▷ Start the engine.
Information
To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Functional requirements
▷ There are no sources of interference
nearby.
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle near
the doors.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐
mote control is in the vehicle.
Seite 41
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Unlocking
On the driver's or front passenger's door han‐
dle, press the button.
This corresponds to pressing the remote control
button:
Locking
On the driver's or front passenger's door han‐
dle, press the button.
This corresponds to pressing the remote control
button:
If a door was unlocked and opened from the
inside via the door opener, all other doors con‐
tinue to be locked. This is the case, if the vehi‐
cle was locked automatically after driving off or
via the central locking system button. In this
case, all doors are unlocked, when pressing the
button on the door handle. The button must be
pressed again for locking.
To save battery power, ensure that all power
consumers are turned off before locking the ve‐
hicle.
Convenient closing
WARNING
With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is risk of injuries. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.◀
Press and hold down the handle of the driver or
the front seat passenger.
This corresponds to pressing and holding the
remote control button:
In addition to locking, the windows and glass
sunroof will be closed.
Unlocking the splot doors separately
Press the button in the handle of the split
doors.
This corresponds to pressing the remote control
button:
The situation of the doors does not change.
Opening split doors with no-touch
activation
The split doors can be opened with no-touch
activation using the remote control you are car‐
rying. Two sensors detect a forward-directed
foot motion in the center of the area at the rear
of the car and the split doors open.
Foot movement to be carried out
WARNING
During no-contact activation of the split
doors, vehicle parts may be touched, e.g. hot
exhaust system. There is risk of injuries. With
Seite 42
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
the foot motion, make sure there is steady
stance and do not touch the vehicle.◀
1. Place in the center behind the vehicle,
about an arm's length from the vehicle
rear.
2. Move a foot in the direction of travel as far
under the vehicle as possible and immedi‐
ately pull it back. With this movement, the
leg must pass through the ranges of both
sensors.
Opening
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the split doors. There is risk of injuries.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
split doors is clear during opening and clos‐
ing.◀
CAUTION
The split doors swivel back and to the
side when they open. There is risk of property
damage. Make sure that the area of movement
of the split doors is clear during opening and
closing.◀
Before the opening, the hazard warning system
flashes.
1.
Perform the foot movement described ear‐
lier.
The right side of the split doors opens, re‐
gardless of whether it was previously
locked or unlocked.
2. After complete opening of the right side,
make a second foot movement in order to
open the left side of the split doors.
If the remote control is in the sensor area, the
split doors can be opened inadvertently by an
unconscious or alleged recognized foot move‐
ment.
The sensor range reaches approx. 5 ft/1.50 m
behind the area at the rear of the car.
Malfunction
Remote control detection by the vehicle can
among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 34.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmit power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity.
Do not transport the remote control together
with metal objects or electronic devices.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
the vehicle using the buttons of the remote
control or using the integrated key, refer to
page 39.
Adjusting
Unlocking
The settings are saved in the active profile. Per‐
sonal Profile, refer to page 36.
Doors
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
Seite 43
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
3. Select the symbol.
4. Select the desired function.
▷ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
locks the entire vehicle.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Split doors
Depending on optional features and country
version, this setting is not offered in some
cases.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Select the symbol.
4. Select the desired function.
▷ "Split rear door"
Only the split doors are opened.
▷ "Split rear door + door(s)"
The split doors are opened and the
doors unlocked.
Locking
The settings are saved in the active profile. Per‐
sonal Profile, refer to page 36.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Select desired setting.
▷ "Lock if no door is opened"
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if no door is
opened after unlocking.
▷ "Lock after start driving"
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive off.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Select desired setting.
▷ With alarm system:
"Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by one honk of
the horn.
▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes,
locking by one.
Alarm system
The concept
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system responds to:
▷ Opening a door, the hood or the split doors.
▷ Movements in the vehicle interior.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐
tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing
the car.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
The alarm system briefly signals tampering:
▷ Acoustic alarm.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning system.
▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.
Switching on and off
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either
with the remote control or with Comfort Access,
the alarm system is switched on and off at the
same time.
Door lock with the alarm system
switched on
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, when the vehicle is unlocked via the
door lock.
Switching off the alarm, refer to page 45.
Seite 44
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Split soors with the alarm system
switched on
The split doors can be opened even when the
alarm system is switched on.
After the split doors are closed, they are locked
and monitored again when the doors are
locked. The hazard warning system flashes
once.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press button on the remote control for
at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Indicator lamp on the interior rearview
mirror
▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The alarm system is switched on.
▷ Indicator lamp flashes for approx. 10 sec‐
onds, then it flashes briefly every 2 sec‐
onds:
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
are not active, as doors, hood, or split doors
are not correctly closed. Correctly closed
access points are secured.
When the still open access points are
closed, interior motion sensor and tilt alarm
sensor will be switched on.
▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐
ing:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the engine ignition is switched on, but
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such as
attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is
towed.
Interior motion sensor
The windows and glass sunroof must be closed
for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
can be switched off together, such as in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehicles,
at sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehi‐
cle is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
are turned off until the vehicle is locked again.
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock vehicle with the remote control or
switch on the ignition, if needed through
emergency detection of remote control, re‐
fer to page 35.
Seite 45
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
▷ For Comfort Access: If you have the remote
control with you, unlock vehicle using the
button on the driver's side or passenger
side door.
Power windows
Information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can move
the vehicle and endanger themselves and traf‐
fic, for example with the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
and lock the vehicle.◀
Overview
Opening
▷
Press the button to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch is held.
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window opens automatically. Pressing
again stops the motion.
See also: Convenient opening, refer to page 38,
via remote control.
Closing
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐
juries or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance point.
The window closes while the switch is held.
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically. Pulling
again stops the motion.
See also: closing by means of Comfort Access,
refer to page 42.
Pinch protection system
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐
juries or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
WARNING
Accessories on the windows such as an‐
tennas can impact jam protection. There is risk
of injuries. Do not install accessories in the area
of movement of the windows.◀
If closing force exceeds a specific margin as a
window closes, closing is interrupted.
The window reopens slightly.
Seite 46
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Closing without the pinch protection
system
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐
juries or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
In case of danger from the outside or if ice
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐
lows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and
hold it there.
The pinch protection is limited and the win‐
dow reopens slightly if the closing force ex‐
ceeds a certain margin.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there.
The window closes without jam protection.
Safety switch
The concept
The opening and closing of the rear window
can be blocked via the safety switch for the
rear. This makes sense, for example, if children
or animals are carried in the rear.
Information
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐
juries or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
In order to prevent uncontrolled closing of the
windows, press the safety switch, for example if
children or animals are carried in the rear.
Overview
Switching on and off
Press button.
The LED lights up if the safety function
is switched on.
Panoramic glass sun‐
roof
Information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed on operating
the glass sunroof. There is risk of injuries. Make
sure that the area of movement of the glass
sunroof is clear during opening and closing.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can move
the vehicle and endanger themselves and traf‐
fic, for example with the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
and lock the vehicle.◀
Seite 47
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Overview
Tilting the glass sunroof
Press back the switch up to or
beyond the resistance point and
release it.
The glass sunroof is raised.
Opening glass sunroof
When the glass sunroof is closed
Press the switch back beyond
the resistance point and release
it twice.
The glass sunroof is opened.
Pressing the switch again stops
the motion.
With the glass sunroof completely
raised
▷ Slide switch back to the re‐
sistance point and hold.
The glass sunroof is opened
as long as the switch is
pressed.
▷ Press the switch back beyond the resist‐
ance point and release it.
The glass sunroof is opened.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Comfort position
If the glass sunroof stops before it is completely
opened, it is in the Comfort position. In this po‐
sition the wind noises in the interior are the
least.
If desired, continue the movement by Pressing
the switch.
Closing glass sunroof
With the glass sunroof open
▷ Slide switch forward to the
resistance point and hold.
The glass sunroof is closed as
long as the switch is pressed
and stops in the raised posi‐
tion.
▷ Press the switch forward beyond the resist‐
ance point and release it.
The glass sunroof is closed and stops in the
raised position.
Pressing the switch toward the back stops
the motion.
▷ Press the switch forward beyond the resist‐
ance point and release it twice.
The glass sunroof is closed.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
With the glass sunroof completely
raised
Press the switch forward beyond
the resistance point and release
it.
The glass sunroof is closed.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
glass sunroof closes, the closing action is inter‐
rupted.
The glass sunroof reopens slightly.
Seite 48
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed on operating
the glass sunroof. There is risk of injuries. Make
sure that the area of movement of the glass
sunroof is clear during opening and closing.◀
Closing without the pinch protection
system
If there is an external danger, proceed as fol‐
lows:
1. Press the switch forward beyond the resist‐
ance point and hold it.
The pinch protection is limited and the
glass sunroof reopens slightly if the closing
force exceeds a certain margin.
2. Press the switch forward again beyond the
resistance point and hold until the glass
sunroof closes without jam protection.
Make sure that the closing area is clear.
Initializing after a power failure
After a power failure, it can happen that the
glass sunroof can only be raised. The system
must be initialized in this case. MINI recom‐
mends having this work performed only by a
dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Seite 49
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Adjusting
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐
tive features and systems.
Sitting safely
The ideal seating position meeting the needs of
the occupants can make a vital contribution to
relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
The seating position plays an important role in
an accident in combination with:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 53.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 54.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 101.
Seats
Information
WARNING
Seat adjustments while driving can lead
to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle
control could be lost. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Only adjust the side on the driver's side
when the vehicle is stationary.◀
WARNING
With a backrest inclined too far to the
rear, the protective effect of the safety belt
cannot be ensured anymore. There is a danger
of sliding under the safety belt in an accident.
There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Adjust
the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the
backrest in an as upright position as possible
and do not adjust again while driving.◀
WARNING
There is risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of property
damage. Make sure that the area of movement
of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.◀
Manually adjustable seats
Overview
1 Forward/backward
2 Thigh support
3 Height
4 Backrest tilt
Seite 50
CONTROLS
Adjusting
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Forward/backward
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired
direction.
After releasing the lever, move the seat forward
or back slightly making sure it engages prop‐
erly.
Height
Pull the lever up or press it down as often as
needed to reach the desired height.
Backrest tilt
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the
backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the spine
are supported for upright posture.
Turn the wheel in order to increase or decrease
the curvature.
Electrically adjustable seats
General information
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
for the profile currently used. When the vehicle
is unlocked via the remote control, the position
is automatically retrieved if the Function, refer
to page 56, is activated for this purpose.
Overview
1 Seat and mirror memory
2 Lumbar support
3 Backrest tilt
4 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
Seite 51
Adjusting
CONTROLS
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Adjustments in detail
Forward/back.
Height.
Seat tilt.
Backrest tilt.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the spine
are supported for upright posture.
▷ Press the front/rear section
of the switch:
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the switch:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Thigh support
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust
the thigh support.
Front seat heating
Overview
Seite 52
CONTROLS
Adjusting
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Switching on
Press button once for each tempera‐
ture level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐
cally with the temperature selected last.
When GREEN Mode, refer to page 169, is acti‐
vated, the heater output is reduced.
Switching off
Press and hold the button, until the
LEDs are no longer illuminated.
Safety belts
Number of safety belts
The vehicle is fitted with five safety belts to en‐
sure occupant safety. However, they can only
offer protection when adjusted correctly.
The two outer safety belt buckles, integrated
into the rear seat, are for passengers sitting on
the left and right.
The center safety belt buckle of the rear seat is
solely intended for the person sitting in the
middle.
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving off.
For the occupants' safety the belt locking
mechanism triggers early. Slowly guide the
safety belt out of the holder when applying it.
If needed, disengage the safety belt in the rear
from the belt buckle on the side.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
Information
WARNING
If the safety belt is used by more than
one person, the protective effect of the safety
belt cannot be ensured anymore. There is risk
of injuries or danger to life. Do not allow more
than one person to wear a single safety belt. In‐
fants and children are not allowed in an occu‐
pant's lap, but must be transported and respec‐
tively secured in designated child restraint
systems.◀
WARNING
The protective effect of the safety belts
can be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐
tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety
belt can cause additional injuries, for example
in the event of an accident or during braking
and evasive maneuvers. There is risk of injuries
or danger to life. Make sure that all occupants
are wearing safety belts correctly.◀
WARNING
With a rear backrest that is not locked,
the protective function of the middle safety belt
is not guaranteed. There is risk of injuries or
danger to life. If you are using the middle safety
belt, lock the wider rear backrest.◀
Correct use of safety belts
▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and as tight
to your body as possible over your lap and
shoulders.
▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over
your lap. The safety belt may not press on
your stomach.
▷ Do not wear the safety belt on your throat,
rub it on sharp edges, guide it or jam it in
across hard or fragile objects.
▷ Avoid thick clothing.
▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up‐
ward around your upper body.
Seite 53
Adjusting
CONTROLS
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Buckling the seat belt
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
Unbuckling the safety belt
1.
Hold the safety belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up
mechanism.
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat
and front passenger seat
The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐
nal sounds. Make sure that the safety
belts are positioned correctly. The
safety belt reminder is active at speeds above
approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be acti‐
vated if objects are placed on the front passen‐
ger seat.
Damage to safety belts
WARNING
The protective effect of the safety belts
may not be fully functional or fail in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ Safety belts are damaged, soiled or
changed in any other way.
▷ Safety belt buckle is damaged or heavily
soiled.
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were
modified.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
the event of an accident. There is risk of injuries
or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts,
safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt retrac‐
tors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have
the safety belts checked after an accident at
the dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.◀
Front head restraints
Information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head restraints
can cause injuries in the head and neck area.
There is risk of injuries. Install head restraints
on occupied seats prior to driving and make
sure that the center of the head restraint sup‐
ports the back of the head at eye level.◀
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is risk of injuries.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, for example, clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been deter‐
mined to be safe for attachment to a head
restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for example pil‐
lows, while driving.◀
Correctly adjusted head restraint
General information
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
Adjust the headrest via the backrest tilt as
needed.
Seite 54
CONTROLS
Adjusting
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at eye level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
as close as possible to the back of the head.
If necessary, adjust the distance by adjusting
the tilt of the backrest.
Adjusting the height: John Cooper
Works
The height of the head restraints cannot be ad‐
justed.
Adjusting the height
▷ To raise: pull.
▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
headrest down.
Removing: John Cooper Works
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Removing
1. Pull head restraint up as far as possible.
2. Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head re‐
straint out completely.
To remove the headrest, fold the backrest rear‐
ward if it is in the upright position.
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
Rear head restraints
Information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head restraints
can cause injuries in the head and neck area.
There is risk of injuries. Install head restraints
on occupied seats prior to driving and make
sure that the center of the head restraint sup‐
ports the back of the head at eye level.◀
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is risk of injuries.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, for example, clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been deter‐
mined to be safe for attachment to a head
restraint.
Seite 55
Adjusting
CONTROLS
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
▷ Do not use any accessories, for example pil‐
lows, while driving.◀
Correctly adjusted head restraint
General information
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at eye level.
Adjusting the height
▷ To raise: push.
▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
headrest down.
Folding down
▷ To lower flaps: press the button, arrow 1,
and press down the head restraint, arrow 2.
▷ Fold back up: pull up head restraints.
Removing
Fold the seat down, refer to page 153, before
removing the head restraint, otherwise the
head restraint cannot be removed.
1. Pull head restraint up against the resist‐
ance.
2. Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head re‐
straint out completely.
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
Seat and mirror memory
The concept
Two driver's seat and exterior mirror positions
can be stored per profile, refer to page 36, and
called up. Settings for the backrest width and
lumbar support are not stored in memory.
Information
WARNING
There is risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of property
damage. Make sure that the area of movement
of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.◀
WARNING
Using the memory function while driving
can lead to unexpected movements of the seat.
Vehicle control could be lost. There is risk of an
accident. Only retrieve the memory function
when the vehicle is stationary◀
Seite 56
CONTROLS
Adjusting
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Overview
Storing
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position.
3.
Press button. The LED in the button
lights up.
4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LED
is lit. The LED goes out.
Button was pressed inadvertently:
Press button again.
The LED goes out.
Calling up settings
Comfort function
1.
Open the driver's door.
2. Switching off the ignition.
3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2.
The corresponding seat position is performed
automatically.
The procedure stops when a switch for adjust‐
ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.
Safety mode
1.
Close the driver's door or switch on the ig‐
nition.
2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2
until the adjustment procedure is com‐
pleted.
Calling up of a seat position
deactivated
After a brief period, calling up stored seat posi‐
tions is deactivated to save battery power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
▷ Open or close the door or split doors.
▷ Press a button on the remote control.
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mir‐
ror setting is stored for the profile currently
used. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐
mote control, the position is automatically re‐
trieved if this function is active.
Information
WARNING
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. The distance to the traffic
behind could be incorrectly estimated, for ex‐
ample while changing lanes. There is risk of an
accident. Estimate the distance to the traffic
behind by looking over your shoulder.◀
Seite 57
Adjusting
CONTROLS
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Overview
1 Adjusting 58
2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Fold in and out 58
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the switch.
Adjusting electrically
The setting corresponds to the direction
in which the button is pressed.
Saving positions
Seat and mirror memory, refer to page 56
Adjusting manually
In case of electrical malfunction press edges of
mirror.
Automatic Curb Monitor
The concept
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the front passenger side is tilted downward.
This improves your view of the curb and other
low-lying obstacles when parking, for example.
Activating
1. Slide the switch to the driver's side
mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror
position.
Fold in and out
CAUTION
Depending on the vehicle width, the ve‐
hicle can be damaged in car washes. There is
risk of property damage. Before washing, fold
in the mirrors by hand or with the button.◀
Press button.
Possible at speeds up to approx.
15 mph/20 km/h.
Folding the mirrors in and out is advantageous
in the following situations:
▷ In car washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
▷ For folding mirrors back out that were
folded away manually.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the engine is running.
Automatic dimming feature
Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim‐
med. Photocells are used to control the Interior
mirror, refer to page 59.
Seite 58
CONTROLS
Adjusting
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Interior mirror, manually dimmable
Flip lever
To reduce the blinding effect of the interior rear
view mirror, flip the lever forward.
Turn knob
Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by
the interior mirror.
Interior mirror, automatic dimming
feature
Overview
Photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Functional requirements
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
Information
WARNING
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move‐
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is
risk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is stationary only.◀
Adjusting
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Fold the lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
tion.
4. Fold the lever back.
5. Switch off the ignition again if needed.
Seite 59
Adjusting
CONTROLS
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐
tive features and systems.
The right place for children
Information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can move
the vehicle and endanger themselves and traf‐
fic, for example with the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
and lock the vehicle.◀
Children should always be in the rear
WARNING
Children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm cannot
correctly fasten the safety belt without suitable
additional restraint systems. The protective ef‐
fect of the safety belts can be limited or lost
when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An
incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause addi‐
tional injuries, for example in the event of an
accident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.
Secure persons shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using
suitable restraint systems.◀
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the rear seat.
Only transport children younger than 13 years
of age or shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm in the rear in
suitable child restraint systems provided in ac‐
cordance with the age, weight and size of the
child.
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
system can no longer be used due to their age,
weight and size.
Children on the front passenger seat
Before using a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, ensure that the front,
knee, and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated. Automatic deactivation of
front-seat passenger airbags, refer to
page 103.
Information
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is risk of inju‐
ries. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
Seite 60
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust
the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and
correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged. If possible,
adjust the height of the head restraints or re‐
move them.◀
Installing child re‐
straint systems
Information
Pay attention to the specifications of the child
restraint system manufacturer when selecting,
installing, and using child restraint systems.
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust
the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and
correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged. If possible,
adjust the height of the head restraints or re‐
move them.◀
In order to faciliate the installation of a back-
facing child restraint system in the rear:
Move the front passenger's seat as far up as
possible before folding down the backrest.
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is risk of inju‐
ries. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
After installing a child restraint system in the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags au‐
tomatically, refer to page 103.
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as possible
and adjust its height to the highest and thus
best possible position for the belt and to offer
optimal protection in the event of an accident.
If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐
cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,
move the passenger seat carefully forward until
the best possible belt guide position is reached.
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be permanently locked to fasten
child restraint systems.
Seite 61
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Locking the safety belt
1. Pull out the strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
belt.
3. Allow the strap to be pulled in and pull it
tight against the child restraint system. The
safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the strap to be pulled in completely.
LATCH child restraint system
Information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.
Pay attention to the operating and safety infor‐
mation of the child restraint system manufac‐
turer when installing and using LATCH child re‐
straint fixing systems.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child is
restrained by the internal harnesses.
Information
WARNING
If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems
are not correctly engaged, the protective effect
of the LATCH child restraint fixing system can
be limited. There is risk of injuries or danger to
life. Make sure that the lower anchors are se‐
curely engaged and that the LATCH child re‐
straint fixing system fits securely against the
backrest.◀
Position
The corresponding symbol shows the
mounts for the lower LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower anchors are
marked with a pair, 2, of LATCH sym‐
bols. It is not recommended to use the
inner lower anchors of standard outer
LATCH positions to fasten a child restraint sys‐
tem on the middle seat. Use the vehicle seat
belt instead for the middle seat.
Before installing LATCH child restraint
systems
Pull the belt away from the area of the child re‐
straint system.
Assembly of LATCH child restraint
systems
1. Install child restraint system, see manufac‐
turer's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Child restraint fixing system with a
tether strap
Information
CAUTION
The mounting points for the upper retain‐
ing straps of child restraint systems are only
provided for these retaining straps. When other
objects are mounted, the anchors can be dam‐
aged. There is risk of property damage. Only
mount child restraint systems to the upper re‐
taining straps.◀
Mounting points
The respective symbol shows the an‐
chor for the upper retaining strap. Seats
with an upper Top Tether are marked
Seite 62
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
with this symbol. It can be found on the rear
seat backrest or the rear window shelf.
Retaining strap guide
WARNING
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly
used for the child restraint system, the protec‐
tive effect can be reduced. There is risk of inju‐
ries. Make sure that the upper retaining strap is
not guided across sharp edges and without
twisting to the upper retaining strap.◀
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Mounting point
5 Seat backrest
6 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the mounting point
1.
Raise the head restraint if needed.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the supports of the head restraint.
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
the anchor on the back seat.
4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
WARNING
In case of an accident, people sitting in
the back can come into contact with the tight‐
ened retaining strap of the child restraint sys‐
tem on the front passenger seat. There is risk of
injuries or danger to life. With a mounted child
restraint system, do not carry any people on
the rear seat behind the front passenger seat.◀
WARNING
If the rear backrest is not locked, the pro‐
tective effect of the child restraint system is lim‐
ited or there is none. In particular situations, for
example braking maneuvers or in case of an
accident, the rear backrest can fold forward.
There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Make
sure that the rear backrests are locked.◀
Locking the doors and
windows
Doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for the rear
Press button on the driver's door if
children are being transported in the
rear.
This locks various functions so that they cannot
be operated from the rear: safety switch, refer
to page 47.
Seite 63
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Driving
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐
tive features and systems.
Start/Stop button
The concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches the ignition on or off
and starts the engine.
Steptronic transmission: the en‐
gine starts in selector lever posi‐
tion P or N with the brake pedal pressed when
you press the Start/Stop button.
Manual transmission: the engine starts with the
clutch pedal pressed when the Start/Stop but‐
ton is pressed.
Ignition on
Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop but‐
ton without stepping on the clutch pedal.
Steptronic transmission: press the Start/Stop
button, and do not press on the brake pedal at
the same time.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator and warning lights in the
instrument cluster light up for a varied length of
time.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Ignition off
Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop but‐
ton again without stepping on the clutch pedal.
Steptronic transmission: shift to selector lever
position P, press the Start/Stop button again
without stepping on the brake.
All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go
out.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
The ignition is switched off automatically in the
following situations while the vehicle is station‐
ary and the engine is off:
▷ During locking, also with the low beams ac‐
tivated.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started. This function is only available when
the low beams are turned off.
▷ When opening and closing the driver door,
if the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the low beams are turned off.
▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled
with driver's door open and low beams off.
▷ The low beams switch to parking lights af‐
ter approx. 15 minutes of no use.
Radio ready state
Activate radio-ready state: when the engine is
running: press the Start/Stop button.
Some electronic systems/power consumers re‐
main ready for operation.
The radio-ready state is switched off automati‐
cally in the following situations:
Seite 64
CONTROLS
Driving
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
▷ After approx. 8 minutes.
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the central
locking system.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
The radio-ready state remains active if, for ex‐
ample, the ignition is automatically switched off
for the following reasons:
▷ Opening or closing the driver's door.
▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.
▷ When automatically switching from low
beams to parking lights.
If the engine is switched off and the ignition is
switched on, the system automatically switches
to the radio-ready state if the lights are turned
off or, if correspondingly equipped, the day‐
time running lights are activated.
Starting the engine
Information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐
less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐
haust gases can also accumulate outside of the
vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the ex‐
haust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐
tion.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can put itself into
motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the
front wheels in the direction of the curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure
the vehicle, for example with a wheel
chock.◀
CAUTION
In the case of repeated starting attempts
or repeated starting in quick succession, the
fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned.
The catalytic converter can overheat. There is
risk of property damage. Avoid repeated start‐
ing in quick succession.◀
Steptronic transmission
Starting the engine
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Engage selector lever position P or N.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a cer‐
tain time and is stopped as soon as the engine
starts.
Manual transmission
Starting the engine
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neu‐
tral.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a cer‐
tain time and is stopped as soon as the engine
starts.
Engine stop
Information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can move
the vehicle and endanger themselves and traf‐
fic, for example with the following actions:
Seite 65
Driving
CONTROLS
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
and lock the vehicle.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can put itself into
motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the
front wheels in the direction of the curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure
the vehicle, for example with a wheel
chock.◀
Before driving into a car wash
So that the vehicle can roll into a car wash ob‐
serve instructions for going into an automatic
car wash, refer to page 221.
Steptronic transmission
Switching off the engine
1.
Engage selector lever position P with the
vehicle stopped.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
The radio-ready state is switched on.
3. Set the parking brake.
Manual transmission
Switching off the engine
1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the
Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
The radio-ready state is switched on.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.
Auto Start/Stop function
The concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, for example, in traffic congestion or at
traffic lights. The ignition remains switched on.
The engine starts again automatically for driv‐
ing off.
Information
After every start of the engine using the Start/
Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in
the last selected state, refer to page 68. When
the Auto Start/Stop function is active, it is avail‐
able when the vehicle is traveling faster than
about 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h.
Depending on the selected driving mode, refer
to page 119, the system is automatically acti‐
vated or deactivated.
Engine stop
The engine is switched off automatically during
a stop under the following conditions:
Manual transmission:
▷ Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is
not pressed.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
Steptronic transmission:
Seite 66
CONTROLS
Driving
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
tion D.
▷ Brake pedal remains depressed while the
vehicle is stopped.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
In order to be able to release the brake pedal,
engage lever in position P. The engine remains
off.
To continue driving depress the brake pedal.
When a gear is engaged, the engine starts au‐
tomatically.
The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced
when the engine is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The display indicates that the
Auto Start/Stop function is ready
for an Automatic engine start.
The display indicates that the
conditions for an automatic en‐
gine stop have not been met.
Functional limitations
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
▷ External temperature too low.
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
matic climate control is running.
▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated
or cooled to the required level.
▷ The engine is not yet at operating tempera‐
ture.
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
steering wheel is being turned.
▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
matic climate control is switched on.
▷ The vehicle battery charge is very low.
▷ At higher elevations.
▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked.
▷ The parking assistant is activated.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
▷ Selector lever in selector lever position R, N
or M/S.
Starting the engine
The engine starts automatically under the fol‐
lowing conditions:
▷ Manual transmission:
The clutch pedal is pressed.
▷ Steptronic transmission:
By releasing the brake pedal.
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of
the following conditions are met:
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the driver's door is open.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lights light up for a varied
length of time.
The engine can only be started via the Start/
Stop button.
Functional limitations
Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior
when the cooling function is switched on.
▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ Steptronic transmission: change from selec‐
tor lever position D to R, N or M/S.
Seite 67
Driving
CONTROLS
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
▷ Steptronic transmission: change from selec‐
tor lever position P to R, N, D or M/S.
▷ The vehicle begins rolling.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
matic climate control is switched on.
▷ The vehicle battery charge is very low.
▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when
the heating is switched on.
▷ Manual transmission: low brake vacuum
pressure; this can occur, for example, if the
brake pedal is depressed a number of times
in succession.
Switching the system on/off
Using the button
Press button.
▷ LED comes on: Auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
The engine is started during an automatic
engine stop.
The engine can only be stopped or started
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ LED goes out: Auto Start/Stop function is
activated.
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
can be switched off permanently, e. g., when
leaving it.
Steptronic transmission:
1. Engage selector lever position P.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
3. Set the parking brake.
Manual transmission:
1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.
Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func‐
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea‐
sons, as it is detected that no driver is present.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches
off the engine automatically. A Check Control
message is displayed. It is possible to continue
driving. Have the system checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Parking brake
The concept
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi‐
cle from rolling when it is parked.
Information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can put itself into
motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
Seite 68
CONTROLS
Driving
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the
front wheels in the direction of the curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure
the vehicle, for example with a wheel
chock.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can move
the vehicle and endanger themselves and traf‐
fic, for example with the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
and lock the vehicle.◀
Overview
Parking brake
Setting
Pull the switch.
The LED lights up.
The indicator lamp lights up red. The
parking brake is set.
Depending on the stopping situation, the park‐
ing brake is engaged automatically.
Steptronic transmission: In some parking situa‐
tions, the parking brake is automatically en‐
gaged, when selector lever position P is en‐
gaged. In these cases, the parking brake is
released automatically when you leave the se‐
lector lever position P.
While driving
Use as emergency brake while driving:
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes
hard while the switch is being pulled.
The indicator lamp lights up red, a sig‐
nal sounds and the brake lights light up.
A Check Control message is displayed.
If the vehicle is slowed down to a speed of ap‐
prox. 2 mph/3 km/h the parking brake is set.
Releasing
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can move
the vehicle and endanger themselves and traf‐
fic, for example with the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
and lock the vehicle.◀
With the ignition switched on:
Manual transmission: Press the switch
while the brake pedal is pressed.
Steptronic transmission: Press the switch while
the brake is pressed or selector lever position P
is set.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
Seite 69
Driving
CONTROLS
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
The parking brake is released.
Automatic release in cars with
Steptronic transmission
For automatic release, step on the accelerator
pedal.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
The parking brake is automatically released
when you step on the accelerator:
▷ Engine on.
▷ Drive mode engaged.
▷ Driver buckled in and doors closed.
Automatic release in cars with manual
transmission
Drive off as usual. The parking brake disen‐
gages when the clutch pedal is released.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
Under the following conditions, the parking
brake is automatically released:
▷ Engine on.
▷ Gear engaged.
▷ Driver buckled in and doors closed.
▷ Engine power is sufficient to drive off.
Malfunction
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
parking brake, secure the vehicle against rolling
using a wheel chock, for example, when leav‐
ing it.
After a power failure
Putting the parking brake into
operation
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2.
Press the switch while stepping on the
brake pedal or selector lever position P is
set.
It may take several seconds for the brake to be
put into operation. Any sounds associated with
this are normal.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out as soon as the parking
brake is ready for operation.
Turn signal, high beams,
headlight flasher
Turn signal
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
The turn signal lever returns into is starting po‐
sition after actuation.
To switch off manually, slightly tap the lever to
the resistance point.
Triple turn signal activation
Slightly tap lever.
The turn signal flashes three times.
The function can be activated or deactivated.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Seite 70
CONTROLS
Driving
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
Malfunction
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp
indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
High beams, headlight flasher
▷ High beams, arrow 1.
▷ Headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Washer/wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and brief
wipe
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry,
as this may damage the wiper blades or cause
them to become worn more quickly.
Information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is
risk of injuries or risk of property damage. Make
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
wipers are in the folded away state and the
wipers are folded in when switching on.◀
CAUTION
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor overheat on switching on. There is risk of
property damage. Defrost the windshield prior
to switching the wipers on.◀
Switching on
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
▷ Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once
beyond the resistance point.
Wipers change to normal speed when vehi‐
cle comes to standstill.
Switching off and brief wipe
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Single wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off from normal wiper speed:
press down once.
Seite 71
Driving
CONTROLS
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
▷ To switch off from fast wiper speed: press
down twice.
Interval mode or rain sensor
The concept
Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the
wiper operation is preset.
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐
shield, directly behind the interior mirror.
Activating/deactivating
Press button on the wiper lever.
Wiping is started. If the vehicle is equipped with
a rain sensor: LED in wiper lever lights up.
When wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper
operation is deactivated.
CAUTION
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in car washes.
There is risk of property damage. Deactivate
the rain sensor in car washes.◀
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of
the rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency
or sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Washing the windshield
Pull the wiper lever towards you.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is risk of an accident. Only use the
washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot
freeze. Use antifreeze if needed.◀
CAUTION
When the wiper water container is empty,
the wash pump cannot work as intended.
There is risk of property damage. Do not use
Seite 72
CONTROLS
Driving
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
the washer system when the wash water con‐
tainer is empty.◀
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐
cally heated while the ignition is switched on.
Rear window wiper
Switching on the rear window wiper
Turn the switch from idle position 0 upward, ar‐
row 1: interval mode. When reverse gear is en‐
gaged, the system switches to continuous op‐
eration.
Cleaning rear window
In interval mode: turn the switch further, ar‐
row 2. The switch automatically returns to its
interval position when released.
In idle position: turn switch downward, arrow 3.
The switch automatically returns to its idle posi‐
tion when released.
Fold-out position of the wipers
Helpful when changing the wiper blades or un‐
der frosty conditions, for example.
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is
risk of injuries or risk of property damage. Make
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
wipers are in the folded away state and the
wipers are folded in when switching on.◀
1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. With icy conditions make sure that blades
are not frozen to the windshield.
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point
of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐
onds, until the wiper remains in a nearly
vertical position.
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to
their resting position and are ready again
for operation.
Washer fluid
General information
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐
voir.
Prepare and dilute a mixture of tap water,
windshield washer concentrate, and possibly
antifreeze prior to filling.
Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Information
WARNING
Some antifreeze agents can contain
harmful substances and are flammable. There
is risk of fire and risk of injuries. Observe the in‐
structions on the containers. Keep antifreeze
away from ignition sources. Do not refill oper‐
ating materials into different bottles. Store op‐
erating materials out of reach of children.
United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer
fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the
Seite 73
Driving
CONTROLS
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
tainer.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concentrate
or the equivalent is recommended.◀
WARNING
Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on
contact with hot engine parts. There is risk of
injuries or risk of property damage. Only add
washer fluid when the engine is cooled down.
Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐
ervoir.◀
CAUTION
Silicon-containing additives in the washer
fluid for the water-repelling effect on the win‐
dows can lead to damage to the washing sys‐
tem. There is risk of property damage. Do not
add silicon-containing additives to the washer
fluid.◀
CAUTION
The use of undiluted and different wind‐
shield washer concentrate or antifreeze can
lead to damage to the washing system. There is
risk of property damage. Dilute windshield
washer concentrate or antifreeze prior to filling.
Observe the information and mixing ratios pro‐
vided on the containers. Do not mix windshield
washer concentrates of different manufactur‐
ers.◀
Overview
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐
gine compartment.
Manual transmission
Information
CAUTION
When shifting to a lower gear, excessive
speeds can damage the engine. There is risk of
property damage. When shifting into 5th or 6th
gear, press the gearshift lever to the right.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can put itself into
motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the
front wheels in the direction of the curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure
the vehicle, for example with a wheel
chock.◀
Shifting
General information
The engine speed during a shifting operation is
adjusted automatically for harmonious and dy‐
namic gear shifting.
Reverse gear
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
To overcome the resistance push the selector
lever dynamically to the left and engage the re‐
verse gear.
Seite 74
CONTROLS
Driving
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Steptronic transmission
Information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can put itself into
motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the
front wheels in the direction of the curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure
the vehicle, for example with a wheel
chock.◀
Selector lever positions
D Drive
Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐
ation. All gears for forward travel are activated
automatically.
R Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral
The vehicle may roll. Use in automatic car
washes, for example.
P Park
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The
drive wheels are blocked.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se‐
lector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the ve‐
hicle may begin to move.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Step on the accelerator pedal be‐
yond the resistance point at the full throttle po‐
sition.
Engaging selector lever positions
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a gear, maintain pressure on the brake
pedal until you are ready to start.
The selector lever can only be taken out of se‐
lector lever position P if the ignition is on or the
engine is running.
With the vehicle stationary, depress the brake
pedal before shifting out of selector lever posi‐
tion P or N; otherwise, the shift block will not be
deactivated and the shift command will not be
executed.
A block prevents the inadvertent switching to
selector lever position P or R or the inadvertent
change from selector lever position P.
Canceling the lock
Press unlock button on the front of the selector
lever, arrow.
Seite 75
Driving
CONTROLS
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Sport program and manual mode M/S
Activating the sport program
Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐
tor lever position D.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, for example, S1.
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐
vated.
Activating the M/S manual mode
1.
Press the selector lever to the left out of se‐
lector lever position D.
2. Push the selector lever forward or back‐
ward.
Manual mode M/S becomes active and the gear
is changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, for example, M1.
If the situation requires, the Steptronic trans‐
mission continues to shift automatically.
Example: once maximum engine speed is at‐
tained, M/S manual mode is automatically up‐
shifted as needed.
Switching to manual mode
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐
wards.
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
and road speeds, for example downshifting is
not possible if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the currently se‐
lected gear.
Manual mode M/S: prevent automatic
upshifting
Once a particular engine speed is attained, M/S
manual mode is automatically upshifted as
needed.
For vehicles with Steptronic Sport transmission,
automatic shift operations are not performed if
one of the following conditions is met:
▷ DSC is deactivated.
▷ TRACTION is activated.
In addition, there is no downshifting for kick‐
down.
With the respective transmission version, the
lowest possible gear can be selected by simul‐
taneously operating the kickdown and the left
shift paddle. This is not possible, when switch‐
ing briefly via the shift paddles from selector
lever position D to manual mode M/S.
Ending the sport program/manual
mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles for Steptronic Sport
transmission
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
▷ Shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle.
Seite 76
CONTROLS
Driving
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
▷ Shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.
▷ The lowest possible gear can be selected by
pulling and holding the left shift paddle.
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
and road speeds, for example downshifting is
not possible if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are
used to shift gears in automatic mode, the
transmission temporarily switches to manual
mode.
In the manual mode, after conservative driving
for a certain amount of time or if there has
been no acceleration or shifting of the shift
paddles within a certain amount of time, the
transmission switches back to automatic mode.
It is possible to switch into the automatic mode:
▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle.
or
▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift
paddle, briefly pull the left shift paddle.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position is dis‐
played, for example: P.
Manually release the transmission lock
Should the selector lever be blocked in selector
lever position P despite the ignition being
turned on, the brake being depressed and the
unlock button being pressed, the transmission
lock can be manually canceled:
Before unlocking the transmission lock man‐
ually, set the parking brake to prevent the vehi‐
cle from rolling away.
1.
Loosen the selector lever sleeve together
with the lower retaining ring and possibly
the Driving Dynamics Control from the cen‐
ter console. For this purpose, pull the re‐
taining ring and possibly the Driving Dy‐
namics Control upward on the rear edge.
2. Lift the sleeve. Unplug the cable connector
if needed.
3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit, refer to page 203, press the
yellow release lever downward, arrow.
4. Move the selector lever slightly toward the
rear; to do this press the unlock button on
the front of the selector lever.
Release the release lever.
5. Bring the selector lever into the desired po‐
sition.
Steptronic Sport transmission: Launch
Control
The concept
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on surfaces with good traction.
Seite 77
Driving
CONTROLS
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
General information
The use of Launch Control causes premature
component wear since this function represents
a very heavy load for the vehicle.
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,
refer to page 162, period.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode, re‐
fer to page 117.
Requirements
Launch Control is available when the engine is
warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving
of at least 6 miles/10 km.
To start with Launch Control do not steer the
steering wheel.
Start with launch control
While the engine is running:
1.
Press button and select SPORT with
Driving Dynamics Control, refer to
page 119.
The instrument cluster displays TRACTION
in combination with SPORT. The DSC OFF
indicator lamp lights up.
2. Engage selector lever position S.
3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
4. Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the
resistance point at the full throttle position,
kickdown.
A flag symbol is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within
3 seconds, release the brake.
Before using Launch Control, allow the trans‐
mission to cool down for approx. 5 minutes.
Seite 78
CONTROLS
Driving
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Displays
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐
tive features and systems.
Instrument cluster
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Tachometer 84
2 Indicator/warning lights
3 Speedometer
4 Fuel gauge 84
5 Display/reset miles 84
6 Electronic displays 80
Seite 79
Displays
CONTROLS
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Electronic displays
1 Driver assistance systems
Messages, e.g., Check Control
Time 84
External temperature 84
Selection lists 88
Total miles/trip odometer 84
On-board computer 88
2 Selector lever position display 75
Gear shift indicator 86
3 Driving Dynamics Control 119
Status
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control system monitors functions in
the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in
the monitored systems.
A Check Control message is displayed as a com‐
bination of indicator or warning lights and text
messages in the instrument cluster and in the
Head-up Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal may be output
and a text message may appear on the Control
Display.
Indicator/warning lights
General information
The indicator and warning lights can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Red lights
Safety belt reminder
Flashing or illuminated: safety belt on
the driver or passenger side is not buck‐
led. The safety belt reminder can also
Seite 80
CONTROLS
Displays
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
be activated if objects are placed on the front
passenger seat.
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
correctly.
Airbag system
Airbag system and belt tensioner are
not working.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Parking brake
The parking brake is set.
For additional information, refer to Re‐
lease parking brake, refer to page 69.
Brake system
Braking system disrupted. Continue to
drive moderately.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Front-end collision warning
Illuminated: advance warning is issued,
e.g., when there is the impending dan‐
ger of a collision or the distance to the
vehicle ahead is too small.
Increase distance.
Flashing: acute warning of the imminent dan‐
ger of a collision when the vehicle approaches
another vehicle at a relatively high differential
speed.
Intervention by braking or make an evasive
maneuver.
Pedestrian warning
If a collision with a person detected in
this way is imminent, the symbol lights
up and a signal sounds.
Orange lights
Active Cruise Control
The number bars shows the selected
distance from the vehicle driving ahead.
For more information, see Camera-
based cruise control, refer to page 121.
Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control
Illuminated: vehicle driving ahead de‐
tected.
Flashing: the conditions are not ade‐
quate for operating the system.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
pedal.
Yellow lights
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
Avoid sudden braking as much as possi‐
ble. Braking force boost may not be
working. Stop cautiously. Take into ac‐
count the longer brake distance. Have
the system immediately checked by a
dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
Flashing: DSC controls the drive and
braking forces. The vehicle is stabilized.
Reduce speed and adapt driving style to
the driving circumstances.
Seite 81
Displays
CONTROLS
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Illuminated: DSC failed. Have the system
checked by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
For additional information, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC, refer to page 117.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated
or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
Dynamic Stability Control DSC is
switched off or Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol DTC is switched on.
For additional information, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC, refer to page 117, and
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
page 118.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
tire inflation pressure in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
For additional information, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor, refer to page 108.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Illuminated: the Tire Pressure Monitor
signals a loss of tire inflation pressure in
a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid
sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Flashing and then continuously illuminated: no
flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be
detected.
▷ Interference through systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: After leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. Re‐
set the system again.
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted: Have it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
For additional information, refer to Tire Pres‐
sure Monitor, refer to page 104.
Steering system
Steering system in some cases not
working.
Have the steering system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Engine functions
Have the vehicle checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.
For additional information, refer to On-board
Diagnostics socket, refer to page 202.
Rear fog lamp
Rear fog lights are activated.
For additional information, refer to Rear
fog lights, refer to page 99.
Green lights
Turn signal
Turn signal switched on.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb
has failed.
For additional information, refer to Turn signal,
refer to page 70.
Seite 82
CONTROLS
Displays
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Parking lights, headlight control
Parking lights or headlights are acti‐
vated.
For additional information, refer to
Parking lights/low beams, headlight control, re‐
fer to page 96.
Front fog lights
Front fog lights are activated.
For additional information, refer to
Front fog lights, refer to page 99.
High-beam Assistant
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
High beams are activated and off auto‐
matically as a function of the traffic sit‐
uation.
For additional information, refer to High-beam
Assistant, refer to page 98.
Cruise control
The system is switched on. It maintains
the speed that was set using the control
elements on the steering wheel.
Blue lights
High beams
High beams are activated.
For additional information, refer to High
beams, refer to page 71.
General lamps
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or is stored.
Text messages
Text messages in combination with a symbol in
the instrument cluster explain a Check Control
message and the meaning of the indicator and
warning lights.
Supplementary text messages
Additional information, such as on the cause of
an error or the required action, can be called up
via Check Control.
With urgent messages the added text will be
automatically displayed on the Control Display.
Symbols
Within the supplementary text, the following
functions can be selected independent of the
check control message.
▷ Display additional information about
the Check Control message in the
Integrated Owner's Manual.
▷ "Service request"
Contact a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
▷ "Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press and hold button on turn signal lever.
▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐
played continuously and are not cleared
until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐
eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐
sages are displayed consecutively.
These messages can be faded for approx.
8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐
played again automatically.
Seite 83
Displays
CONTROLS
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
▷ Other Check Control messages are faded
automatically after approx. 20 seconds.
They are stored and can be displayed again
later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
On the Control Display:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
Messages after trip completion
Special messages displayed while driving are
displayed again after the ignition is switched
off.
Fuel gauge
Vehicle tilt position may cause
the display to vary.
The arrow beside the fuel pump
symbol shows which side of the
vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.
Hints on refueling, refer to page 178.
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is interrupted
to protect the engine.
Odometer and trip odom‐
eter
The concept
Odometer and trip odometer are displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Resetting the trip odometer
Press the knob.
▷ The odometer is displayed
when the ignition is switched
off.
▷ When the ignition is switched
on, the trip odometer is re‐
set.
External temperature
If the indicator drops to
+37 ℉/+3 ℃, a signal sounds.
A Check Control message is dis‐
played.
There is an increased risk of ice
on roads.
WARNING
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a danger of icy roads, for example
on bridges or shady sections of road. There is
risk of an accident. Adjust your driving style to
the weather conditions at low temperatures.◀
Time
The time is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
Setting the time on the Control
Display, refer to page 91.
Date
The date is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
Set the date on the Control Dis‐
play, refer to page 91.
Seite 84
CONTROLS
Displays
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Range
Display
With a low remaining range:
▷ A Check Control message is
displayed briefly.
▷ The remaining range is
shown on the onboard com‐
puter.
▷ With a dynamic driving style, e.g. taking
curves aggressively, the engine function is
not always ensured.
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
CAUTION
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not ensured
anymore. There is risk of property damage. Re‐
fuel promptly.◀
Displaying the cruising range
1.
"Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. "Range"
Current fuel consump‐
tion
The concept
Displays the current fuel consumption. Check
whether you are currently driving in an efficient
and environmentally-friendly manner.
Displaying the current fuel
consumption
1.
"Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. "Current consumption"
Service requirements
The concept
After the ignition is turned on the instrument
cluster briefly displays available driving distance
or time to the next scheduled maintenance.
A service advisor can read out the current serv‐
ice requirements from your remote control.
Display
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Display.
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion.
Symbols
Symbols Description
No service is currently required.
The deadline for scheduled
maintenance or a legally man‐
dated inspection is approach‐
ing.
The service deadline has al‐
ready passed.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the required inspections.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly.
Seite 85
Displays
CONTROLS
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
On the Control Display:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
6. Adjust the settings.
7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored.
Gear shift indicator
The concept
The system recommends the most fuel efficient
gear for the current driving situation.
General information
Depending on the vehicle's features and coun‐
try version of the vehicle, the gear shift indica‐
tor is active in the manual mode of the Step‐
tronic transmission and with manual
transmission.
Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Manual transmission: displaying
Example Description
Fuel efficient gear is set.
Shift into fuel efficient gear.
Steptronic transmission: displaying
Example Description
Fuel efficient gear is set.
Shift into fuel efficient gear.
Speed limit detection
The concept
Speed limit detection
Speed limit detection shows the current maxi‐
mum permitted speed in the instrument clus‐
ter. The camera at the base of the interior rear‐
view mirror detects traffic signs at the edge of
the road as well as variable overhead sign
posts. Traffic signs with extra symbols for wet
road conditions, etc. are also detected and
compared with the vehicle's onboard data,
such as for the rain sensor, and will be dis‐
played depending on the situation.
With the navigation system, the system takes
into account the information stored in the navi‐
gation data and also displays speed limits
present on routes without signs.
Without a navigation system, the system is sub‐
ject to limitations imposed by technology.
Speed limits with extra text characters are al‐
ways displayed.
Information
Speed limits when towing a trailer are not
shown.
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the per‐
sonal responsibility to correctly assess visibility
and traffic situation. There is risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions.
Seite 86
CONTROLS
Displays
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in
the respective situations.◀
Overview
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior mirror clean and clear.
Display
Speed limit detection is displayed via the on‐
board computer.
Press button on the turn signal lever several
times if needed.
Speed limit detection is displayed on the CID
(central information display) in the instrument
cluster.
Speed limit detection
The last speed limit detected.
Without a navigation system the
traffic signals are grayed out af‐
ter curves or longer stretches of
roadway.
With navigation system: speed
limit detection is not available.
Without navigation system: no
speed limit or cancellation is de‐
tected.
Speed limit detection can also be displayed in
the Head-up Display.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ When signs are concealed by objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a
sticker, etc.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
system are incorrect.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such
as due to changes in road routing.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a speed
sticker.
Seite 87
Displays
CONTROLS
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
Selection lists in the in‐
strument cluster
The concept
With the buttons on the steering wheel and the
display in the instrument cluster the following
can be displayed or operated:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial phone feature.
▷ Turn on voice activation system.
It also displays programs of the Driving Dynam‐
ics Control.
Display
Activating a list and adjusting the
setting
Button the steering wheel Function
Activate the respec‐
tive list and select the
desired settings.
Confirm the selection.
On-board computer
Calling up information on the info
display
Press and hold button on blinker lever.
Information is displayed in the info display of
the instrument cluster.
Information at a glance
Info display
Repeatedly pressing the button
on the turn signal lever calls up
the following information in the
info display:
▷ Range.
▷ GREEN Info.
When GREEN Mode is activated.
▷ Average fuel consumption.
▷ Current fuel consumption.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Date.
▷ Engine temperature display.
▷ With equipment version with Head-up Dis‐
play and navigation:
Distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ With equipment version with Head-up Dis‐
play and navigation:
Time of arrival.
Seite 88
CONTROLS
Displays
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Speed limit detection.
▷ Speed.
Selecting information
You can select what information from the on‐
board computer is to be displayed on the CID
(central information display) of the instrument
cluster.
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. Select the desired information.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Information in detail
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
It is calculated based on your driving style over
the last 20 miles/30 km.
GREEN info
Description of GREEN info, refer to page 171.
Average fuel consumption
This is calculated for the period while the en‐
gine is running.
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the distance traveled since the last reset by the
onboard computer.
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
engine manually stopped are not included in
the calculation of the average speed.
Resetting average values
Press and hold button on turn signal lever.
Engine temperature display
Displays the current engine temperature, based
on a combination of coolant and motor oil tem‐
perature. As soon as the optimum operating
temperature has been attained, the indicator is
in the center position.
If the engine oil or coolant, thus the engine, be‐
come too hot, a Check Control message is dis‐
played.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 199.
With equipment version with Head-up
Display and navigation: distance to
destination
The distance remaining to the destination is
displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐
gation system before the trip is started.
The distance to the destination is adopted au‐
tomatically.
With equipment version with Head-up
Display and navigation: time of arrival
The estimated time of arrival is displayed if a
destination is entered in the navigation system
before the trip is started.
The time must be correctly set.
Speed limit detection
Speed limit detection is preset. Description of
the speed limit detection, refer to page 86,
function.
Seite 89
Displays
CONTROLS
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Trip onboard computer
The vehicle features two types of onboard
computers.
▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as
often as necessary.
▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an
overview of the current trip.
Resetting the trip onboard computer
On the Control Display:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset": all values are reset.
"Automatically reset": all values are reset
approx. 4 hours after the vehicle came to a
standstill.
Display on the Control Display
Display the onboard computer or trip onboard
computer on the Control Display.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Resetting the fuel consumption and
speed
On the Control Display:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Onboard info"
3. "Consumpt." or "Speed"
4. "Yes"
Driving Excitement
The concept
On the Control Display, sport instruments can
be displayed, and the vehicle condition can be
checked before the use of the SPORT program.
Sport instruments
On the Control Display, values for power and
torque are displayed.
Displaying sport instruments
Via onboard monitor:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Driving Excitement"
3. "Sports instruments"
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
1. Activating SPORT.
2. "Driving Excitement"
3. "Sports instruments"
Vehicle state
The following vehicle and surrounding area
data are automatically checked and evaluated
in succession:
▷ Range.
▷ Engine temperature.
▷ External temperature.
▷ SPORT program state.
Finally, a total evaluation of the vehicle state is
displayed.
Checking vehicle state
Via onboard monitor:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Driving Excitement"
3. "Vehicle and surroundings"
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
1.
Activating SPORT.
2. "Driving Excitement"
3. "Vehicle and surroundings"
Seite 90
CONTROLS
Displays
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Speed warning
The concept
Displays speed limit which, when reached,
should cause a warning to be issued.
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
drops below the set speed limit once by at least
3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the
limit
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired limit is
displayed.
5. Press the Controller.
The speed limit is stored.
Activating/deactivating the limit
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"
4. Press the Controller.
Setting your current speed as the limit
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
4. Press the Controller.
The current vehicle speed is stored as the
limit.
Settings on the Control
Display
Time
Setting the time zone
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time zone:"
4. Select the desired time zone.
The time zone is stored.
Setting the time
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time:"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
5. Press the Controller.
6. Turn the Controller until the desired mi‐
nutes are displayed.
7. Press the Controller.
The time is stored.
Setting the time format
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The time format is stored.
Date
Setting the date
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired day is
displayed.
Seite 91
Displays
CONTROLS
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
5. Press the Controller.
6. Make the necessary settings for the month
and year.
The date is stored.
Setting the date format
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The date format is stored.
Language
Setting the language
To set the language on the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Setting the voice dialog
Voice dialog for the voice activation system, re‐
fer to page 27.
Units of measurement
Setting the units of measurement
To set the units for fuel consumption, route/
distance and temperature:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Brightness
Setting the brightness
To set the brightness of the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
5. Press the Controller.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness settings may not be clearly visible.
LED ring on the central
instrument cluster
The concept
The LED ring displays light animations to repre‐
sent specific functions.
Basic displays
Basic functions, for example the tachometer,
can be set to be displayed continually if so de‐
sired.
Event displays
Functions that are only displayed temporarily,
for example the volume or temperature set‐
tings, can be set as event displays.
Several vehicle assistance functions can also be
displayed on the LED ring. This display corre‐
sponds with the displays of the function in the
respective display.
Example: tachometer
Like the tachometer in the instrument cluster,
the light animations of the tachometer's basic
display show the current RPMs and the respec‐
tive RPM warning margins.
Seite 92
CONTROLS
Displays
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Display
▷ Arrow 1: current RPM.
▷ Arrow 2: prewarning field.
▷ Arrow 3: warning field.
Switching on/off LED ring
1.
"Settings"
2. "Center Instrument"
3. "Center Instrument"
Adjusting the LED ring
1.
"Settings"
2. "Center Instrument"
3. "Basic display" or "Event display"
4. Select desired setting.
Setting the brightness
The brightness can be adjusted when night
lighting is active in the instrument cluster.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Center Instrument"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Head-up Display
The concept
This system projects important information into
the driver's field of vision, e. g., the speed.
The driver can quickly absorb information and
concentrate on the traffic situation.
Information
CAUTION
The Head-up Display consists of sensitive
components that can easily be scraped or dam‐
aged. There is risk of property damage. Do not
place any objects on the Head-up Display, at‐
tach to system components or plug into the
system. Do not move the moving parts man‐
ually.◀
WARNING
When extending and retracting the pro‐
jection screen of the Head-up Display, body
parts can be jammed. There is risk of injuries.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
projection screen is clear during opening and
closing.◀
Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head-
up Display, refer to page 224.
Overview
Display visibility
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐
play is influenced by the following factors:
▷ Certain sitting positions.
Seite 93
Displays
CONTROLS
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
play.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet roads.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
Switching on/off
When switching on, the projection lens of the
Head-up Display is extended. When switching
off, the projection lens of the Head-up Display
is retracted again.
Press button.
Display
Overview
The following information is displayed on the
Head-up Display:
▷ Speed.
▷ Navigation system.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster.
▷ Driver assistance systems.
Some of this information is only displayed
briefly as needed.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Displayed information"
4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up
Display.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
5. Press the Controller.
When the low beams are activated, the bright‐
ness of the Head-up Display can be additionally
influenced using the instrument lighting, refer
to page 99.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Adjusting the height
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Height"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired height
is reached.
5. Press the Controller.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Setting the rotation
The screen of the Head-up Display can be ro‐
tated around its own axis.
Seite 94
CONTROLS
Displays
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Rotation"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired setting
is selected.
5. Press the Controller.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Seite 95
Displays
CONTROLS
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Lights
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐
tive features and systems.
Overview
Switches in the vehicle
The light switch elements is located next to the
steering wheel.
Light functions
Symbol Function
Rear fog lights
Front fog lights
Automatic headlight control
Symbol Function
Lights off
Daytime running lights
Parking lights
Low beams
Instrument lighting
Parking lights, corner‐
ing lights and roadside
parking lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
If the driver door is opened with the ignition
switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐
cally switched off at these switch settings.
Parking lights
Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐
ods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐
charged and it would then be impossible to
start the engine.
When parking, switch on the one-sided road‐
side parking lamp, refer to page 97.
Low beams
Position of switch:
The low beams light up when the ignition is
switched on.
Seite 96
CONTROLS
Lights
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Roadside parking lights
The concept
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Switching on
With the ignition switched off, press the lever
either up or down past the resistance point for
approx. 2 seconds.
Switching off
Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in
the opposite direction.
Welcome lights and
headlight courtesy de‐
lay feature
Welcome lights
General information
Depending on the equipment, when switching
off the vehicle, switch position or .
Depending on the ambient brightness, individ‐
ual light functions may be switched on briefly,
when the vehicle is unlocked.
Activating/deactivating
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Welcome lights"
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Headlight courtesy delay feature
General information
The low beams stay lit for a short while if the
headlight flasher is switched on after the vehi‐
cle's radio-ready state is switched off.
Setting the duration
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway lighting:"
4. Set length of time.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Automatic headlight
control
The concept
The low beams are switched on and off auto‐
matically depending on the ambient bright‐
ness, e.g. in tunnels, in twilight or if there is
precipitation.
General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
When emerging from a tunnel during the day,
the low beams are not switched off immedi‐
ately but instead only after approx. 2 minutes.
Activating
Position of switch:
The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster is
illuminated, when the low beams are switched
on.
Seite 97
Lights
CONTROLS
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
System limits
The automatic headlamp control cannot serve
as a substitute for your personal judgment of
lighting conditions.
E. g. the sensors are unable to detect fog or
hazy weather. To avoid safety risks under these
conditions, you should always switch on the
lights manually.
Daytime running lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
The daytime running lights light up when the
ignition is switched on. After the ignition is
switched off, the parking lights light up in posi‐
tion .
Activating/deactivating
In some countries, daytime running lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐
vate the daytime running lights.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
Settings are stored for the remote control cur‐
rently used.
Cornering lamp
General information
Position of switch:
When going around corners, the cornering light
also lights the interior area of the curve. Below
a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h when the
turn signal is switched on and the steering an‐
gle is detected, there is automatic activation.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
Cornering light is malfunctioning or has failed.
Have the system immediately checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
High-beam Assistant
The concept
The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic
participants early on and automatically
switches the high beams on or off depending
on the traffic situation. The assistant ensures
that the high beams are switched on, whenever
the traffic situation allows. In the low speed
range, the high beams are not switched on by
the system.
General information
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
The driver can intervene at any time and switch
the high beams on and off as usual.
Activating
1.
Depending on the equipment, turn the light
switch into position or .
2. Press button on the turn signal lever, arrow.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up.
Seite 98
CONTROLS
Lights
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
When the low beams are on, the lights are au‐
tomatically brightened or dimmed.
The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster lights up when the system
switches on the high beams.
Deactivating
The High-beam Assistant is deactivated when
manually switching the high beams on and off,
refer to page 71.
To reactivate the High-beam Assistant, press
the button on the turn signal lever.
System limits
The High-beam Assistant cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver's personal judgment of
when to use the high beams. Therefore, man‐
ually switch off the high beams in situations
where required to avoid a safety risk.
The system is not fully functional in the follow‐
ing situations, and driver intervention may be
necessary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
and wagons; when driving close to train or
ship traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming
traffic on highways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the
presence of highly reflective signs.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
Fog lights
Front fog lights
The low beams must be switched on.
Press button. The green indicator lamp
lights up.
If the automatic headlight control, refer to
page 97, is activated, the low beams will come
on automatically when you switch on the front
fog lights.
When the high beams or headlight flasher are
activated, the front fog lights are not switched
on.
Rear fog lights
The low beams or front fog lights must be
switched on.
Press button. The yellow indicator
lamp lights up.
If the automatic headlight control, refer to
page 97, is activated, the low beams will come
on automatically when you switch on the rear
fog lights.
Instrument lighting
Adjusting
The parking lights or low beams
must be switched on to adjust
the brightness.
Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel.
Interior lights
General information
The interior lights, footwell lights, access lights
and courtesy lights are controlled automati‐
cally.
Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting con‐
trols brightness of some of these features.
Seite 99
Lights
CONTROLS
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Overview
1 Interior lights
2 Reading lights
3 Ambient light
Switching the interior lights on and off
Press button.
To switch off permanently: press the button for
approx. 3 seconds.
Switch back on: press button.
Switching the reading lamps on and off
manually
Press button.
Reading lights are located in the front next to
the interior light.
Ambient light
Depending on your optional features lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the interior.
Activating/deactivating
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Ambient:"
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Changing color
Push the switch forward or back:
manual color change.
Push and hold the switch forward or
back: automatic color change. Push
the switch again to end color changes.
Setting the brightness
The brightness of the ambient light can be ad‐
justed via the thumbwheel for the instrument
lighting or on the Control Display.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Brightness:"
4. Adjust the brightness.
Seite 100
CONTROLS
Lights
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Safety
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐
tive features and systems.
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag
4 Side airbag
5 Knee airbag
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and front
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in
which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐
equate restraint.
Side airbag
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
Head airbag
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
the head.
Seite 101
Safety
CONTROLS
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Ejection Mitigation
The head airbag system is designed as an ejec‐
tion mitigation countermeasure to reduce the
likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants
through side windows during rollovers or side
impact events.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
impact.
Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end
collisions.
Information for optimum effect of the
airbags
WARNING
If the seat position is incorrect or the de‐
ployment area of the airbags is impacted, the
airbag system cannot protect as intended or
cause additional injuries due to triggering.
There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Ob‐
serve the hints for optimum protective effect of
the airbag system.◀
▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep
the risk of injury to your hands or arms as
low as possible when the airbag is trig‐
gered.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting
correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs
in the floor area and does not support them
on the dashboard.
▷ There should be no persons, animals or ob‐
jects between an airbag and a person.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, do not cover them or
modify them in any way.
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front
passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐
tach adhesive labels or coverings and do
not attach brackets or cables, e. g., for GPS
devices or' mobile phones.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not specifically suited for seats with
integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
This also applies to steering wheel covers,
the dashboard, and the seats.
▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
Even when you follow all instructions very
closely, injury from contact with the airbags
cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐
ing impairment in sensitive individuals.
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
Functional readiness of the airbag
system
Information
WARNING
Individual components can be hot after
triggering of the airbag system. There is risk of
injuries. Do not touch individual components.◀
WARNING
Improperly executed work can lead to
failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering
of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc‐
Seite 102
CONTROLS
Safety
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
tion, the airbag system could not trigger as in‐
tended in the event of an accident despite re‐
spective accident severity. There is risk of
injuries or danger to life. Have the airbag sys‐
tem checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap‐
ped by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.◀
Correct function
When the ignition is switched on, the
warning lamp in the instrument cluster
lights up briefly and thereby indicates
the operational readiness of the entire airbag
system and the belt tensioner.
Airbag system malfunctioning
▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the
ignition is turned on.
▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously.
Automatic deactivation of the front-
seat passenger airbags
The concept
The system reads if the front passenger seat is
occupied by measuring the human body's re‐
sistance.
Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐
senger's side are either activated or deacti‐
vated.
Information
Before transporting a child on the front passen‐
ger seat, refer to the safety notes and instruc‐
tions for children on the front passenger seat,
see Children.
WARNING
The ensure the front-seat passenger air‐
bag function, it must be detected, whether a
person occupies the front passenger seat. The
entire seat cushion area must be used for this
purpose. There is risk of injuries or danger to
life. Make sure that the front passenger keeps
his or her feet in the floor area.◀
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults,
the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐
tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case,
the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger
airbags lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
and the indicator lamp goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To enable correct recognition of the occupied
seat cushion.
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or
other items to the front passenger seat un‐
less they are specifically determined to be
safe for use on the front passenger seat.
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
passenger seat if a child restraint system is
to be installed on it.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
Indicator lamp for the front-seat
passenger airbags
The indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger
airbags indicates the operating state of the
front-seat passenger airbags.
Seite 103
Safety
CONTROLS
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei‐
ther activated or deactivated.
▷ The indicator lamp lights up
when a child is properly
seated in a child restraint fix‐
ing system or when the seat
is empty. The airbags on the
front passenger side are not
activated.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
for example, a correctly seated person of
sufficient size is detected on the seat. The
airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐
tivated.
Detected child seats
The system generally detects children seated in
a child seat, particularly in child seats required
by NHTSA when the vehicle was manufactured.
After installing a child seat, make sure that the
indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger air‐
bags lights up. This indicates that the child seat
has been detected and the front-seat passen‐
ger airbags are not activated.
Strength of the driver's and front-seat
passenger airbag
The explosive power that activates driver's/
front passenger's airbags very much depends
on the positions of the driver's/front passeng‐
er's seat.
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long-term, calibrate the front seats as soon
as a relevant Check Control message is dis‐
played. A message also appears on the Control
Display.
Calibrating the front seats
WARNING
There is risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of property
damage. Make sure that the area of movement
of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.◀
An appropriate Check Control message is dis‐
played.
1. Move the respective seat all the way for‐
ward.
2. Move the respective seat forward again. It
moves forward briefly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when
the Check Control message disappears.
If the message continues to be displayed, re‐
peat the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a re‐
peat calibration, have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM
The concept
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in
the four mounted tires. The system warns you if
there is a significant loss of pressure in one or
more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the tire
valves measure the tire inflation pressure.
Information
With use of the system observe further infor‐
mation found under Tire inflation pressure, re‐
fer to page 182.
Functional requirements
The system must have been reset with the cor‐
rect tire inflation pressure; otherwise, reliable
signaling of tire pressure loss is not assured.
Reset the system after each adjustment of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to en‐
sure that the system will operate properly.
Seite 104
CONTROLS
Safety
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Status display
The current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM can be displayed on the Control Display,
e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.
On the Control Display:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)"
The status is displayed.
Status control display
Tire and system status are indicated by the
color of the tires and a text message on the
Control Display.
All wheels green
System is active and will issue a warning rela‐
tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during
the last reset.
One wheel is yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire.
All wheels are yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
several tires.
Wheels, gray
The system cannot detect a flat tire due to a
malfunction.
Status information
The status control display additionally shows
the current tire inflation pressures. It shows the
actual values read; they may vary depending
on driving style or weather conditions.
Carry out reset
Reset the system after each adjustment of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
On the Control Display and on the vehicle:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Perform reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive off.
5. Reset the tire inflation pressure using
"Perform reset".
6. Drive away.
The tires are shown in gray and the status is
displayed.
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
accepted as reference values. The resetting
process is completed automatically while driv‐
ing. After successful completion of the reset,
the tires appear in green on the Control Display
and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) active" is dis‐
played.
The progress of the reset is displayed.
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When
you continue the reset resumes automatically.
Low tire pressure message
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
▷ A reset of the system was not carried out
after a wheel was changed. The system
therefore issues a warning based on the tire
pressures before the last reset.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 188, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
Seite 105
Safety
CONTROLS
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run-flat
tires can maintain limited stability. There is risk
of an accident. Do not continue driving if the
vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires. Ob‐
serve the hints on run-flat tires and continued
driving with these tires.◀
A low tire inflation pressure might turn on DSC
Dynamic Stability Control.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
Do this by checking the air pressure in all
four tires.
The tire pressure gauge of the Mobility Sys‐
tem, refer to page 189, can be used for this
purpose.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
If identification of flat tire damage is not
possible, please contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
2.
Fix the flat tire using the Mobility System,
refer to page 189.
Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility System,
may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this
case, have the electronics checked at the next
opportunity and have them replaced if needed.
Run-flat tires
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the
next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
shown to be correct, it is possible that the
Tire Pressure Monitor did not perform a re‐
set. Then perform the reset.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐
ing style and road conditions.
A vehicle with an average load has a possible
driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.
A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differently,
e.g., it has reduced lane stability during brak‐
ing, a longer braking distance and different
self-steering properties. Adjust your driving
style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐
neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs,
potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance depends
on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the
actual distance may be shorter or longer de‐
pending on the driving speed, road conditions,
external temperature, cargo load, etc.
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently when a
run-flat tire is damaged and has low or missing
tire inflation pressure, for example, your lane
stability is reduced when braking, braking dis‐
tances are longer and the self-steering proper‐
ties will change. There is risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Seite 106
CONTROLS
Safety
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐
dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Required inflation pressure check
message
A Check Control message is displayed in the fol‐
lowing situations
▷ The system has detected a wheel change,
but no reset was done.
▷ Inflation was not carried out according to
specifications.
▷ The tire inflation pressure has fallen below
the level of the last confirmation.
In this case:
▷ Check the tire pressure and correct as
needed.
▷ Carry out a reset of the system after a tire
change.
System limits
The system does not function properly if a reset
has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is re‐
ported though tire inflation pressures are cor‐
rect.
The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's
temperature. Driving or exposure to the sun
will increase the tire's temperature, thus in‐
creasing the tire inflation pressure. The tire in‐
flation pressure is reduced when the tire tem‐
perature falls again. These circumstances may
cause a warning when temperatures fall very
sharply.
The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire
damage caused by external circumstances.
Malfunction
The yellow warning lamp flashes and
then lights up continuously. A Check
Control message is displayed. No flat
tire or loss of tire pressure can be detected.
Examples and recommendations in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics, for exam‐
ple an emergency wheel, is mounted: Have
it checked by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: Have system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. Re‐
set the system again.
▷ Interference through systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: After leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS
138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As
an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys‐
tem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is signifi‐
cantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Un‐
der-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
Seite 107
Safety
CONTROLS
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's han‐
dling and stopping ability. Please note that the
TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte‐
nance, and it is the driver's responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-in‐
flation has not reached the level to trigger illu‐
mination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐
mately one minute and then remain continu‐
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as in‐
tended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a va‐
riety of reasons, including the installation of re‐
placement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re‐
placement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor
The concept
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.
It detects a tire inflation pressure loss by com‐
paring the rotational speeds of the individual
wheels while moving.
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
the corresponding wheel changes. This will be
detected and reported as a flat tire.
Functional requirements
The system must have been initialized when
the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐
wise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as‐
sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.
Status display
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g.,
whether or not the FTM is active.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)"
The status is displayed.
Initialization
When initializing the once set inflation tire pres‐
sures serve as reference values in order to de‐
tect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐
firming the inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Perform reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive off.
5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset".
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.
Indication of a flat tire
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
Seite 108
CONTROLS
Safety
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation
pressure.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 188, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run-flat
tires can maintain limited stability. There is risk
of an accident. Do not continue driving if the
vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires. Ob‐
serve the hints on run-flat tires and continued
driving with these tires.◀
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control is switched on if needed.
System limits
A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all
four tires will not be recognized. Therefore,
check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
Sudden serious tire damage caused by external
circumstances cannot be recognized in ad‐
vance.
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction
wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting).
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1. Identify the damaged tire.
Do this by checking the air pressure in all
four tires.
The tire pressure gauge of the Mobility Sys‐
tem, refer to page 189, can be used for this
purpose.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
been initialized. In this case, initialize the
system.
If identification of flat tire damage is not
possible, please contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
2.
Fix the flat tire using the Mobility System,
refer to page 189.
Run-flat tires
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the
next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
been initialized. In this case, initialize the
system.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐
ing style and road conditions.
Seite 109
Safety
CONTROLS
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
A vehicle with an average load has a possible
driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.
A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differently,
e.g., it has reduced lane stability during brak‐
ing, a longer braking distance and different
self-steering properties. Adjust your driving
style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐
neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs,
potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance depends
on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the
actual distance may be shorter or longer de‐
pending on the driving speed, road conditions,
external temperature, cargo load, etc.
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently when a
run-flat tire is damaged and has low or missing
tire inflation pressure, for example, your lane
stability is reduced when braking, braking dis‐
tances are longer and the self-steering proper‐
ties will change. There is risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐
dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Intelligent Safety
The concept
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of
the driver assistance system.
The intelligent safety systems can hel prevent
an imminent collision.
▷ Front-end collision warning with City Brak‐
ing function, refer to page 111.
▷ Person warning with City light braking func‐
tion, refer to page 114.
Information
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from the personal responsibility. Due to system
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
not be output or they may be output too late or
incorrectly. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
spective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
for example approach control warning with
light braking function. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off
prior to tow-starting/towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Switching on/off
Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐
Seite 110
CONTROLS
Safety
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
gent Safety systems activate according to the
last setting.
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off ac‐
cording to their respective settings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective
to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are stored
for the profile currently used.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
activated.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
turned off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Front-end collision
warning with City Brak‐
ing function
The concept
The system can help prevent accidents. If an
accident cannot be prevented, the system will
help reduce the collision speed.
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐
ently if needed.
The automatic braking intervention is done
with limited force and duration.
The system is controlled via a camera in the
base of the mirror.
The front-end collision warning is available
even if cruise control has been deactivated.
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle
intentionally, the collision warning and braking
are delayed in order to avoid false system reac‐
tions.
General information
The system warns at two levels of an imminent
danger of collision at speeds from approx.
3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with
the current driving situation.
Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to
35 mph/60 km/h.
Detection range
It responds to objects if they are detected by
the system.
Information
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from the personal responsibility. Due to system
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
not be output or they may be output too late or
incorrectly. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
spective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
for example approach control warning with
light braking function. There is risk of an acci‐
Seite 111
Safety
CONTROLS
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
dent. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off
prior to tow-starting/towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior rear‐
view mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving-off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety system
is displayed. The systems are individually
switched off according to their respective
settings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective
to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are stored
for the profile currently used.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
activated.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
turned off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Setting the warning time
The warning time can be set via the onboard
monitor.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"
3. Activate the desired warning time on the
Control Display.
The selected warning time is stored for the pro‐
file currently used.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐
nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐
ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display.
Seite 112
CONTROLS
Safety
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning.
You are requested to intervene by
braking or make an evasive maneu‐
ver.
Prewarning
This warning is issued, for example, when there
is the impending danger of a collision or the
distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is a prewarning.
Acute warning with braking function
Acute warning in displayed in case of the immi‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another object at a high differential
speed.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is
assisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐
vention in a possible risk of collision.
Acute warnings can also be triggered without
previous forewarning.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. Premise for the brake booster
is sufficiently quick and sufficiently hard step‐
ping on the brake pedal. The system can assist
with some braking intervention if there is risk of
a collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus
come to a complete stop.
Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐
vention up to a complete stop, the engine may
be shut down.
The braking intervention is executed only if DSC
Dynamic Stability Control is switched on.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively
moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
of the detection range and functional restric‐
tions are to be considered.
System limits
Information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not at
all due to the system limits. There is risk of acci‐
dents or risk of property damage. Observe the
system limits and actively interfere if needed.◀
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
E. g. the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
front windshield are dirty or covered.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
deactivated, for example DSC OFF.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop button.
Seite 113
Safety
CONTROLS
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun
low in the sky.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
the more warnings are displayed. However,
there may also be an excess of false warnings.
Person warning with City
light braking function
The concept
The system can help prevent accidents with pe‐
destrians.
The system issues a warning in the city driving
speed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐
lision with pedestrians and includes a braking
function.
A camera at the base of the rearview mirror
controls the system.
General information
With sufficient brightness, the system warns
about possible collision danger with pedes‐
trians starting at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to ap‐
prox. 35 mph/60 km/h and assists with braking
before a collision.
Under those circumstances it reacts to people
who are within the detection range of the sys‐
tem.
Detection range
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
ided into two areas
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐
cated within the central area. A warning is is‐
sued about pedestrians who are located within
the extended area only if they are moving in
the direction of the central area.
Information
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from the personal responsibility. Due to system
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
not be output or they may be output too late or
incorrectly. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
spective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
for example approach control warning with
light braking function. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off
prior to tow-starting/towing.◀
Seite 114
CONTROLS
Safety
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior rear‐
view mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving-off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off ac‐
cording to their respective settings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective
to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are stored
for the profile currently used.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
activated.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
turned off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
The red symbol is displayed and a signal
sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or
make an evasive maneuver.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. Premise for the brake booster
is sufficiently quick and sufficiently hard step‐
ping on the brake pedal. The system can assist
with some braking intervention if there is risk of
a collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus
come to a complete stop.
Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐
vention up to a complete stop, the engine may
be shut down.
The braking intervention is executed only if DSC
Dynamic Stability Control is switched on.
Seite 115
Safety
CONTROLS
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively
moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
of the detection range and functional restric‐
tions are to be considered.
System limits
Information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not at
all due to the system limits. There is risk of acci‐
dents or risk of property damage. Observe the
system limits and actively interfere if needed.◀
Detection range
The detection potential of the camera is lim‐
ited.
Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late.
E. g. the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of the viewing angle or contour.
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 inches/80 cm.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
front windshield are dirty or covered.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
deactivated, for example DSC OFF.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun
low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside.
Brake force display
The concept
▷ During normal brake application, the brake
lights light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the flash‐
ers light up in addition.
PostCrash
In the event of an accident, the system can
bring the car to a halt automatically without in‐
tervention by the driver in certain situations.
This can reduce the risk of a further collision
and the consequences thereof.
Depressing the brake pedal can cause the vehi‐
cle to brake harder. This interrupts automatic
braking. Destepping on the gas pedal also in‐
terrupts automatic braking.
After coming to a halt, the brake is released au‐
tomatically. Secure the vehicle against rolling.
Seite 116
CONTROLS
Safety
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐
tive features and systems.
Anti-lock Braking System
ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking.
The vehicle contains its steering power even
during full brake applications, thus increasing
active safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the greatest possible
braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐
tance to a minimum during emergency stop.
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided
by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the emergency stop.
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
The concept
Dynamic Stability Control detect for example
the following unstable driving conditions:
▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
▷ Loss of traction of the front wheel, which
can lead to understeering.
Within the physical limits, the system helps to
keep the vehicle on a steady course by reduc‐
ing engine speed and by applying brakes to the
individual wheels.
Information
The system does not relieve the driver from his
responsibility to adjust his driving style accord‐
ing to the situation.
Therefore, adjust the driving style according to
the situation and do not reduce the additional
safety margin by driving in a risky manner.
WARNING
When driving with roof load, for example
with roof-mounted luggage rack, driving safety
may not be ensured in driving-critical situations
due to the elevated center of gravity. There is
risk of accidents or risk of property damage. Do
not deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC
when driving with roof load.◀
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC controls
the drive and braking forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
failed.
Seite 117
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐
duced during acceleration and when driving in
curves.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Press and hold this button but not lon‐
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐
strument cluster and displays DSC OFF.
DSC is switched off.
Activating DSC
Press button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
lamp go out.
Indicator/warning lights
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is de‐
activated.
Automatic activation
When DSC is deactivated, automatic activation
occurs in the following situations:
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
▷ When activating cruise control in TRACTION
or DSC OFF mode.
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control
The concept
DTC is a version of the DSC where forward mo‐
mentum is optimized.
The system ensures maximum headway on
special road conditions, for example unplowed
snowy roads or loose road surfaces, but with
somewhat limited vehicle stability.
When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐
mum traction. Driving stability is limited during
acceleration and when driving in curves.
Therefore drive with appropriate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances:
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or
driving off from loose grounds.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
Traction Control
Activating DTC
Press button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC
OFF lights up.
Deactivating DTC
Press button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator
lamp go out.
Performance Control
Performance Control enhances the agility of the
vehicle.
To increase maneuverability, with a corre‐
spondingly sporty driving style, wheels are
braked individually.
Seite 118
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Dynamic Damping Con‐
trol
The concept
The tuning of the suspension can be changed
with the system.
Programs
The system offers several different programs.
Select the programs via the Driving Dynamics
Control, refer to page 119.
MID/GREEN
Balanced tuning of the shock absorbers for
more comfort.
SPORT
Consistently sporty tuning of the shock absorb‐
ers for greater driving agility.
Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol
The concept
The Driving Dynamics Control helps to fine-
tune the vehicle's settings and features. Choose
between three different programs. Driving Dy‐
namics Control will activate the particular pro‐
gram.
Operating the programs
Driving Dynamics Control Program
MID
GREEN
SPORT
MID
For balanced tuning.
With each starting operation, MID is activated
using the Start/Stop button.
GREEN
GREEN, refer to page 169, provides consistent
tuning to maximize range.
Activating GREEN
Turn Driving Dynamics Control to the right until
GREEN is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Configuring GREEN
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
1.
Activate GREEN.
2. "Configure GREEN"
3. Configure the program.
This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is
activated.
Via onboard monitor:
1.
"Settings"
2. "GREEN Mode"
or
1.
"Settings"
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Configure GREEN"
Configure the program.
This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is
activated.
SPORT
Consistently sporty tuning of the drivetrain for
greater driving agility.
With the appropriate equipment, the tuning of
the suspension also changes and SPORT can be
individually configured.
The configuration is stored for the profile cur‐
rently used.
Seite 119
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Activating SPORT
Turn Driving Dynamics Control to the left until
SPORT is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Configuring SPORT
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
when the display is activated on the Control
Display, the SPORT driving mode can be config‐
ured for individual specifications.
Activating SPORT.
Select "Configure SPORT".
Configure the program.
SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐
vated:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Configure SPORT"
This configuration is retrieved when SPORT is
activated.
Configuring driving program
Settings can be made for the following driving
programs in Driving mode:
▷ GREEN, refer to page 119.
▷ SPORT, refer to page 119.
Displays
Program selection
With Driving Dynamics Control
turned on a list of programs is
displayed and can be selected.
Selected program
The instrument cluster displays
the selected program.
Display on the onboard monitor
Program changes can be displayed on the on‐
board monitor.
1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Driving mode info"
Drive-off assistant
The concept
This system supports driving off on inclines. The
parking brake is not required.
Driving off with the drive-off assistant
1.
Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐
out delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
For vehicles with respective equipment ver‐
sions, the possible holding duration amounts to
2 minutes.
Seite 120
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐
tive features and systems.
Camera-based cruise con‐
trol
The concept
Use this system to select a desired speed that
the vehicle will maintain automatically on clear
roads.
To the extent possible, the system automati‐
cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle
ahead of you.
A camera on the interior rear view mirror is
used to detect vehicles driving ahead.
The distance that the vehicle maintains to the
vehicle ahead of you can be varied.
For safety reasons, it depends on the speed.
To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐
tomatically decelerates, applies the brakes
lightly, or accelerates again if the vehicle ahead
begins moving faster.
As soon as the road is clear, the vehicle acceler‐
ates to the desired speed.
The speed is also maintained downhill, but may
not be maintained uphill if engine power is in‐
sufficient.
General information
The system is functional at speeds beginning at
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
Active cruise control is paused below approx.
20 mph/30 km/h.
The system does not brake to a stop.
Depending on the driving program, refer to
page 119, set, the characteristics of the cruise
control in particular areas can change.
Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the per‐
sonal responsibility to correctly assess the traf‐
fic situation. Based on the limits of the system,
it cannot independently react to all traffic situa‐
tions. There is risk of an accident. Adjust the
driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
spective situations.◀
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the per‐
sonal responsibility to correctly assess visibility
and traffic situation. There is risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions.
Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in
the respective situations.◀
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Press button Function
Cruise control on/off, refer to
page 122
Store/maintain speed, refer to
page 123
Seite 121
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Press button Function
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 122
Continue cruise control with the
last setting, refer to page 123
Reduce distance, refer to
page 123
Increase distance, refer to
page 123
Increase, maintain, and store
speed, refer to page 123
Reduce, maintain, and store
speed, refer to page 123
Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's ser‐
ies, optional features and country specifica‐
tions.
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior rear‐
view mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off and interrupting cruise
control
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
Display in the instrument cluster lights
up.
Display in the instrument cluster lights
up. The current speed is adopted as de‐
sired speed and displayed with symbol.
Cruise control is active and maintains the set
speed.
DSC will be switched on if needed.
Switching off
Press button on the steering wheel.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is
deleted.
Interrupting
Press button on the steering wheel.
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the brakes are applied.
▷ If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few
seconds or released while a gear is not en‐
gaged.
▷ If selector lever position N is set.
▷ When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti‐
vated.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ If the detection range of the camera is im‐
paired, e.g., by soiling, heavy precipitation
or glare effects from the sun.
▷ If the vehicle in front decelerates below a
speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
Seite 122
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Maintaining, storing, and changing the
speed
Information
WARNING
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
justed or called up by mistake. There is risk of
an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively interfere in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Risk of accident due to too high speed
differences to other vehicles, for example in the
following situations:
▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving ve‐
hicle.
▷ Suddenly swerving vehicle onto the own
lane.
▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles.
There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Watch
traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
spective situations.◀
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press button.
Or:
Press or button in the interrupted state.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
The speed is displayed on the symbol.
DSC will be switched on if needed.
Changing the speed
or button: press until the desired speed
is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
▷ or button: each time it is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ or button: each time it is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
or button: hold down to repeat the cor‐
responding action.
Distance
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the per‐
sonal responsibility. Due to the system limits,
braking can be late. There is risk of accidents or
risk of property damage. Be aware to the traffic
situation at all times. Adjust the distance to the
traffic and weather conditions and maintain the
prescribed safety distance, possibly by brak‐
ing.◀
Reduce distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
The set distance is briefly displayed in
the left part of the instrument cluster.
Increase distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
The set distance is briefly displayed in
the left part of the instrument cluster.
Continue cruise control
While driving
Press button with the system inter‐
rupted. Cruise control is continued with
Seite 123
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
the saved values. The selected distance is
briefly displayed in the info display.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is
deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
Changing between cruise control with/
without distance control
WARNING
The system does not react to traffic driv‐
ing ahead of you, but instead maintains the
stored speed. There is risk of accidents or risk of
property damage. Adjust the desired speed to
the traffic conditions and brake as needed.◀
Changing to Active Cruise Control without dis‐
tance control:
Press and hold this button, or
Press and hold this button.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up.
To switch back to cruise control, press one of
the buttons briefly.
After switching, a Check Control message is dis‐
played.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Desired speed
In addition to the indicator lamp, the
desired speed is displayed in the central
information display.
▷ The indicator lights up green: the system is
active.
▷ The indicator lights up orange: the system
has been interrupted.
▷ No display: system is switched off.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
rently fulfilled.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
Selected distance from the vehicle driving
ahead is briefly displayed in the left hand por‐
tion of the info display.
Distance display
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance 4
This value is set automatically after
the system is switched on.
Indicator/warning lights
Symbol lights up orange:
A vehicle has been detected ahead of
you.
Symbol flashes orange:
The conditions are not adequate for the
system to work.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
pedal.
Symbol flashes red and a signal sounds:
You are requested to intervene by brak‐
ing or make an evasive maneuver.
The system has been interrupted or dis‐
tance control is temporarily suppressed
Seite 124
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
because the accelerator pedal is being pressed;
a vehicle was not detected.
Distance control is temporarily sup‐
pressed because the accelerator pedal
is being pressed; a vehicle was de‐
tected.
Displays in the Head-up Display
The information from Active Cruise Control can
also be displayed in the Head-up Display.
Adjusting the Head-up Display, refer to
page 93.
System limits
Information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not at
all due to the system limits. There is risk of acci‐
dents or risk of property damage. Observe the
system limits and actively interfere if needed.◀
Speed range
The system is best used on well-constructed
roads. The system is functional at speeds be‐
ginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
The max. speed that can be set is
85 mph/140 km/h.
Comply with the legal speed limit and safety
distance in every situation when using the sys‐
tem.
Detection range
The detection capacity of the system and the
automatic braking capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not
be detected.
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the per‐
sonal responsibility to correctly assess the traf‐
fic situation. Based on the limits of the system,
it cannot independently react to all traffic situa‐
tions. There is risk of an accident. Adjust the
driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
spective situations.◀
Deceleration
The system also does not decelerate in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In case of pedestrians, cyclists or similar
slow road users.
▷ For red traffic lights.
▷ For cross traffic.
▷ For oncoming traffic.
▷ Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonworking
lighting at night.
Seite 125
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Swerving vehicles
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected
until it is completely within the same lane as
your vehicle.
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐
ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, for ex‐
ample, when rapidly approaching a truck.
When a vehicle driving ahead of you is reliably
detected, the system requests that the driver
intervene by braking and carrying out evasive
maneuvers, if needed.
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the per‐
sonal responsibility to correctly assess the traf‐
fic situation. Based on the limits of the system,
it cannot independently react to all traffic situa‐
tions. There is risk of an accident. Adjust the
driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
spective situations.◀
Cornering
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐
not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive
into a curve at an appropriate speed.
In tight curves the system offers only restricted
detection where a vehicle ahead of you might
be detected late or not at all.
When you approach a curve the system may
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to
the bend of the curve. If the system decelerates
you may compensate it by briefly accelerating.
After releasing the gas pedal the system is reac‐
tivated and controls speed independently.
Weather
In the event of unfavorable weather and light
conditions, e. g. if there is rain, snowfall, slush,
fog or glare, this may result in poorer recogni‐
tion of vehicles as well as short-term interrup‐
tions for vehicles that are already detected.
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for
example by braking, steering or evading.
Seite 126
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed if the sys‐
tem fails or was automatically deactivated.
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ When an object was not correctly detected.
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
front windshield are dirty or covered.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ Up to 20 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
Cruise control
The concept
The system is functional at speeds beginning at
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
It maintains the speed that was set using the
control elements on the steering wheel.
The system brakes on downhill gradients if en‐
gine braking is insufficient.
Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the per‐
sonal responsibility to correctly assess the traf‐
fic situation. Based on the limits of the system,
it cannot independently react to all traffic situa‐
tions. There is risk of an accident. Adjust the
driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
spective situations.◀
WARNING
The use of the system can lead to an in‐
creased risk of accidents in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ On winding roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or
on a loose road surface.
There is risk of accidents or risk of property
damage. Only use the system if driving at con‐
stant speed is possible.◀
General information
Depending on the driving program, refer to
page 119, set, the characteristics of the cruise
control in particular areas can change.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Press button Function
Cruise control on/off
Store speed
Pausing cruise control
Continue cruise control with the
last setting
Increasing, maintaining or storing
the speed
Reducing, maintaining or storing
the speed
Controls
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
Seite 127
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up.
The current speed is adopted as the de‐
sired speed and is displayed with the
symbol in the instrument cluster.
Cruise control is active and maintains the set
speed.
DSC will be switched on if needed.
Switching off
Press button on the steering wheel.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is
deleted.
Interrupting
When active, press the button on the
steering wheel.
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the brakes are applied.
▷ If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few
seconds or released while a gear is not en‐
gaged.
▷ If the gear engaged is too high for the cur‐
rent speed.
▷ If selector lever position N is set.
▷ When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti‐
vated.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
Maintaining, storing, and changing the
speed
Information
WARNING
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
justed or called up by mistake. There is risk of
an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively interfere in the respective situations.◀
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press button.
Or
or button: press while the system is in‐
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
This is displayed in the instrument cluster.
DSC will be switched on if needed.
Changing the speed
or button: press repeatedly until the de‐
sired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
▷ or button: each time it is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ or button: each time it is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set de‐
pends on the vehicle.
▷ or button: pressing it to the resist‐
ance point and holding it there accelerates
or decelerates the vehicle without requiring
pressure on the accelerator pedal. After the
button is released, the vehicle maintains its
final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the
resistance point causes the vehicle to accel‐
erate more rapidly.
Seite 128
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Continue cruise control
Press button on the steering wheel.
The stored speed is reached and maintained.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Indicator lamp
Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐
ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐
tem is switched on.
Desired speed
The desired speed is displayed together
with the symbol.
▷ The indicator lights up green: the
system is active.
▷ The indicator lights up orange: the system
has been interrupted.
▷ No display: system is switched off.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
rently fulfilled.
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol
The concept
PDC is a support when parking. When you
slowly approach an object in the rear - or also
in the front of the vehicle if the feature is avail‐
able - then the object is reported through:
▷ Signal tones.
▷ Visual display.
General information
Ultrasound sensors in the bumpers measure
the distances from objects.
The maneuvering range, depending on obsta‐
cles and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given with the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ By the front middle sensors and the two
corner sensors at approx. 24 inches/60 cm.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.
5 ft/1.50 m.
▷ When a collision is imminent
Information
Loud noises from outside and inside the vehicle
may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal
tone.
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the per‐
sonal responsibility to correctly assess the traf‐
fic situation. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐
tively interfere in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to high speeds when PDC is acti‐
vated, the warning can be delayed due to phys‐
ical circumstances. There is risk of injuries or
risk of property damage. Avoid approaching an
object too fast. Avoid driving off fast while PDC
is not yet active.◀
Overview
With front PDC: button in vehicle
Seite 129
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
PDC Park Distance Control
Ultrasound sensors
Ultrasound sensors of the PDC,
for example in the bumpers.
Functional requirements
To ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, for example, with
stickers, bicycle racks.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
To clean: when using high-pressure washers,
do not spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 inches/30 cm.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
PDC switches on automatically in the following
situations:
▷ If selector lever position R is engaged when
the engine is running.
The rearview camera also switches on.
▷ With front PDC: when obstacles are de‐
tected behind or in front of the vehicle by
PDC and the speed is slower than approx.
2.5 mph/4 km/h.
With front PDC: You can switch off automatic
activation on obstacle detection:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Parking"
3. Select setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if needed.
With front PDC: switching on/off
manually
Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The rearview camera image is displayed when
the reverse gear is engaged by pressing the
button.
Display
Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermittent
sound indicates the position of the object. E. g.
if an object is detected to the left rear of the ve‐
hicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear
speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
With front PDC: if objects are located both in
front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating
continuous signal is sounded.
The signal tone is switched off, when selector
lever position P is engaged on vehicles with
Steptronic transmission.
Volume
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the
entertainment volume can be adjusted.
1.
"Multimedia", "Radio" or
"Settings"
2. "Tone"
Seite 130
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
3. "Volume settings"
4. "PDC"
5. To adjust: turn the Controller.
6. To store: press the Controller.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can be
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are already displayed on the Con‐
trol Display before a signal sounds.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance
Control (PDC) is activated.
The range of the sensors is represented in col‐
ors: red, green and yellow.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, the switch can be made to PDC:
"Rear view camera"
System limits
Information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not at
all due to the system limits. There is risk of acci‐
dents or risk of property damage. Observe the
system limits and actively interfere if needed.◀
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measuring might not function under
the following circumstances:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for exam‐
ple coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, for example from passing vehicles
or loud machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged
or out of position.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
treme heat or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
Low objects already displayed, for example,
curbs, can move into the blind area of the sen‐
sors before or after a continuous tone sounds.
False warnings
PDC may issue a warning under the following
conditions even though there is no obstacle
within the detection range:
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered with
ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, for example, in underground
garages.
▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ Through heavy pollution.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for exam‐
ple, sweeping machines, high pressure
steam cleaners or neon lights.
The malfunction is signaled by a continuous
tone alternating between the front and rear
speakers. As soon as the malfunction due
to other ultrasound sources is no longer
present, the system is again fully functional.
Seite 131
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
With front PDC: to reduce false alarms, switch
off automatic PDC activation on obstacle detec‐
tion, for example in car washes, refer to
page 130.
Malfunction
A Check Control message, refer to page 80, is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Red symbol is displayed, and the range
of the sensors is dimmed on the Control
Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked.
Rearview camera
The concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Dis‐
play.
Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the per‐
sonal responsibility to correctly assess the traf‐
fic situation. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐
tively interfere in the respective situations.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Rearview camera
Camera
The camera lens is located between the license
plate lights.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
Clean the camera lens, refer to page 224.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐
tion P R.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if needed.
Switching on/off manually
Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The PDC is shown on the Control Display.
The rearview camera image is displayed when
the reverse gear is engaged by pressing the
button.
Seite 132
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Switching the view via the onboard
monitor
With PDC activated:
"Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Display on the Control Display
Functional requirement
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ Split doors are completely closed.
Activating the assistance functions
More than one assistance function can be ac‐
tive at the same time.
▷ Parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Lanes and turning radius are indicated.
▷ Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.
Pathway lines
Pathway lines can be superimposed on the im‐
age of the rearview camera.
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space
required when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
Pathway lines depend on the current steering
angle and are continuously adjusted to the
steering wheel movements.
Turning circle lines
Turning circle lines can be superimposed on the
image of the rearview camera.
Turning circle lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an‐
gle.
Obstacle marking
Obstacle markings can be faded into the image
of the rearview camera.
Their colored margins of the obstacle markings
match the markings of the PDC.
Seite 133
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Parking using pathway and turning
radius lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐
dius lines lead to within the limits of the
parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning radius line.
Display settings
Brightness
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the Controller.
Contrast
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the Controller.
System limits
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles or high, protruding objects
such as ledges may not be recognized by the
system.
Assistance functions also take into account data
of the PDC.
Follow instructions in the PDC chapter, refer to
page 129.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
under certain circumstances are closer than
they appear. Therefore, do not estimate the
distance from the objects on the display.
Parking assistant
The concept
This system assists the driver in parking parallel
to the road.
Parking assistant handling is divided into three
steps:
▷ Switching on and activating.
▷ Parking space search.
▷ Parking.
System status and instructions on required ac‐
tions are displayed on the Control Display.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on
both sides of the vehicle.
The parking assistant calculates the best possi‐
ble parking line and takes control of steering
during the parking procedure.
Seite 134
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Information
A component of the parking assistant is the
PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 129.
When parking, also take note of the visual and
acoustic information issued by the PDC, the
parking assistant and, where applicable, the
rearview camera, and react accordingly.
Loud noises from outside and inside the vehicle
may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal
tone.
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the per‐
sonal responsibility to correctly assess the traf‐
fic situation. Based on the limits of the system,
it cannot independently react to all traffic situa‐
tions. There is risk of an accident. Adjust the
driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
spective situations.◀
CAUTION
The parking assistant can steer the vehi‐
cle over or onto curbs. There is risk of property
damage. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
terfere in the respective situations.◀
An engine that has been switched off by the
Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati‐
cally when the parking assistant is activated.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Parking assistant
Ultrasound sensors
The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking
spaces are located on the wheel housing.
To ensure full functionality:
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in‐
ches/30 cm.
▷ Do not put stickers over sensors.
Requirements
For measuring parking spaces
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space
▷ Gaps behind an object that has a min.
length of 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects:
your vehicle's length plus approx.
3.3 ft/1.0 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
Regarding the parking procedure
▷ Doors and split doors are closed.
▷ Parking brake released.
Seite 135
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
▷ When parking in parking spaces on the
driver's side, the corresponding turn signal
must be set.
Switching on and activating
Switching on with the button
Press button.
The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automatically.
Switching on with reverse gear
Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
To activate: "Parking Assistant"
Indicator on the Control Display
System activated/deactivated
Symbol Meaning
Gray: the system is not available.
White: the system is available but not
activated.
The system is activated.
Parking space search and system status
▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side of
the vehicle illustrated. Parking assistant is
activated and search for parking space ac‐
tive.
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking
spaces at the edge of the road next to the
vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant
is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐
lighted.
▷ The parking procedure is ac‐
tive. Steering control has
been taken over by system.
▷ Parking space search is always active
whenever the vehicle is moving forward
slow and straight, even if the system is de‐
activated. When the system is deactivated,
the displays on the Control Display are
shown in gray.
Parking using the parking assistant
1.
Press button or shift into reverse gear
to switch the parking assistant on, refer to
page 136. Activate the parking assistant if
needed.
Parking assistant is activated.
2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed
of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and at a
distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.
The status of the parking space search and
possible parking spaces are displayed on
the display, refer to page 136.
3. Follow the instructions on the display.
The best possible parking position will
come after gear change on the stationary
vehicle - wait for the automatic steering
wheel move.
The end of the parking procedure is indi‐
cated on the display.
4. Adjust the parking position yourself if
needed.
Seite 136
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Interrupting manually
The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
time:
▷ "Parking Assistant"
▷ Press button.
Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the
following situations:
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if
he takes over steering.
▷ If a gear is selected that does not match the
instruction on the display.
▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
6 mph/10 km/h.
▷ Possible on snow-covered or slippery road
surfaces.
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts
or the time taken for parking is exceeded.
▷ If the Park Distance Control PDC displays
clearances that are too small.
▷ When switching into other functions of the
radio.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Resume
An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐
tinued if needed.
Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to
page 136, and follow the instructions on the
display.
Switching off
The system can be deactivated as follows:
▷ Press button.
▷ Switching off the ignition.
System limits
Information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not at
all due to the system limits. There is risk of acci‐
dents or risk of property damage. Observe the
system limits and actively interfere if needed.◀
No parking assistance
The parking assistant does not offer assistance
in the following situations:
▷ In tight curves.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
▷ On slippery ground.
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space.
▷ With a mounted emergency wheel.
▷ With ditches or edges, for example an edge
of a port.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measuring might not function under
the following circumstances:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for exam‐
ple coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, for example from passing vehicles
or loud machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged
or out of position.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
treme heat or strong wind.
Seite 137
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
Low objects already displayed, for example,
curbs, can move into the blind area of the sen‐
sors before or after a continuous tone sounds.
The parking assistant may identify parking
spaces that are not suitable for parking.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked.
Seite 138
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Climate control
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐
tive features and systems.
Air conditioner
1 Vent settings
2 Air flow
3 Temperature
4 Seat heating, right 52
5 Cooling function
6 Recirculated-air mode
7 Rear window defroster
8 Windshield defroster
9 Seat heating, left 52
Seite 139
Climate control
CONTROLS
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Climate control functions in detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Set any air volume.
Switching off
Turn wheel for air quantity to the
left until the control switches off.
Temperature
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
Cooling function
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and
dehumidified and, depending on the tempera‐
ture setting, warmed again.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the
engine running.
Press button.
Air conditioning is switched on or off.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
The air conditioner produces condensation wa‐
ter, refer to page 164, that will exit from below
the car.
Recirculated-air mode
You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently within
the vehicle.
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply
of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐
nently blocked.
To prevent window condensation, recirculated
air mode switches off automatically after a cer‐
tain amount of time, depending on the external
temperature.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the
fogging of the windows increases.
If the windows fog over, switch off recirculated-
air mode and increase the air flow, if needed.
Air flow, manual
Turn the ring to set the desired
air volume.
The higher the rate, the more ef‐
fective the heating or cooling will
be.
The air flow from the air conditioner may be re‐
duced automatically to save battery power.
Manual air distribution
Turn the wheel to select the de‐
sired program or the desired in‐
termediate setting.
▷ Windows.
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Floor area.
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor
area.
Seite 140
CONTROLS
Climate control
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Defrosts windows and removes
condensation
Direct the air distribution toward windows, in‐
crease the air flow and temperature, and, if
needed, use the cooling function.
Windshield defroster
Press button.
The front window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
Rear window defroster
Press button.
The rear window defroster switches off
automatically after a certain period of time.
When GREEN Mode, refer to page 169, is acti‐
vated, the heater output is reduced.
Microfilter
In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐
crofilter filters dust and pollen from the air.
This filter should be replaced during scheduled
maintenance, refer to page 201, of your vehi‐
cle.
Automatic climate control
1 Temperature, left
2 Display
3 Air flow, AUTO intensity
4 AUTO program
5 Air distribution, manual
6 Display
7 Temperature, right
8 Seat heating, right 52
Seite 141
Climate control
CONTROLS
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
9 Maximum cooling
10 Cooling function
11 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐
lated-air mode
12 Rear window defroster
13 Windshield defroster
14 Defrosts windows and removes condensa‐
tion
15 Seat heating, left 52
Climate control functions in detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Set any air volume.
Switching off
Turn wheel for air quantity to the
left until the control switches off.
Temperature
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
The automatic climate control reaches this
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed
by increasing the cooling or heating output,
and then keeps it constant.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐
perature settings. The automatic climate con‐
trol will not have sufficient time to adjust the
set temperature.
Cooling function
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and
dehumidified and, depending on the tempera‐
ture setting, warmed again.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the
engine running.
Press button.
Air conditioning is switched on or off.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water, refer to page 164, develops
that exits underneath the vehicle.
Maximum cooling
Press button.
The system is set to the lowest temper‐
ature, optimum air flow and air circulation
mode.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
The function is available with external tempera‐
tures beyond approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
engine running.
Adjust air flow with the program active.
AUTO program
Press button.
Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐
ture are controlled automatically.
Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO
intensity and outside influences, the air is di‐
rected to the windshield, side windows, upper
body, and into the floor area.
The cooling function, refer to page 142, and
the automatic recirculation control, refer to
Seite 142
CONTROLS
Climate control
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
page 143, are automatically also switched on
in the AUTO program.
To switch off the program: press the button
again or manually adjust the air distribution.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐
matic intensity control can be changed.
Turn the ring to set the desired
intensity from soft to intensive.
The set intensity is displayed via the position of
the illuminated LED segment.
Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently within
the vehicle.
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air con‐
trol: a sensor detects pollutants in the out‐
side air and shuts off automatically.
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
manently blocked.
To prevent window condensation, recirculated
air mode switches off automatically after a cer‐
tain amount of time, depending on the external
temperature.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the
fogging of the windows increases.
If windows are fogged over, switch off the recir‐
culating mode and press the AUTO button.
Make sure that air can flow to the windshield.
Air flow, manual
To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐
gram first.
Turn the ring to set the desired
air volume.
The manually adjusted air flow is displayed via
illuminated LED segments.
The air flow of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Manual air distribution
Press button repeatedly to select a
program:
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Upper body region and floor area.
▷ Floor area.
▷ Windows and floor area.
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor
area.
▷ Windows and upper body region.
▷ Windows.
Defrosts windows and removes
condensation
Press button.
Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
moved from the windshield and the front side
windows.
Adjust air flow with the program active.
If the windows fog over, also switch on the
cooling function or press the AUTO button.
Windshield defroster
Press button.
Seite 143
Climate control
CONTROLS
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
The front window defroster switches off auto‐
matically after a certain period of time.
Rear window defroster
Press button.
The rear window defroster switches off
automatically after a certain period of time.
When GREEN Mode, refer to page 169, is acti‐
vated, the heater output is reduced.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐
crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust,
pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.
This filter should be replaced during scheduled
maintenance, refer to page 201, of your vehi‐
cle.
Ventilation
Setting
The air flow directions can be individually ad‐
justed:
▷ Direct ventilation:
The air flow is directly pointed onto the per‐
son. The air flow heats or cools noticeably,
depending on the adjusted temperature.
▷ Indirect ventilation:
If the vents are fully or partly closed, the air
is directly routed into the car's interior.
Front ventilation
▷ Turn knob for continuous opening and clos‐
ing of the vents.
▷ Swivel the vents to alter the direction of the
vent flow, arrow.
Ventilation in the rear
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheel for continuous opening and
closing of the vents, arrow 2.
Parked-car ventilation
The concept
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐
cle interior and lowers its temperature, if
needed.
The system can be switched on and off at any
external temperature, either directly or by us‐
ing two preset reel-on times. It remains
switched on for 30 minutes.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Seite 144
CONTROLS
Climate control
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Switching on/off directly
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate comf. ventilation"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes if the system is switched on.
Preselecting the switch-on time
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
4. Set the desired time.
Activating the switch-on time
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol lights up when the reel-on time is acti‐
vated.
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes when the system has been switched
on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐
vated.
Seite 145
Climate control
CONTROLS
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐
tive features and systems.
Universal Integrated Re‐
mote Control
The concept
The Universal Integrated Remote Control can
operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled
systems such as garage door drives or lighting
systems. The Universal Integrated Remote Con‐
trol replaces up to 3 different hand-held trans‐
mitters. To operate the remote control, the but‐
tons on the interior rearview mirror must be
programmed with the desired functions. The
hand-held transmitter for the particular system
is required in order to program the remote con‐
trol.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
Information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, for example the
garage door, using the integrated universal re‐
mote control. There is risk of injuries or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety instructions of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.◀
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
ing or in the instructions of the system
to be controlled, the system is generally
compatible with the Universal Integrated Re‐
mote Control.
If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ A dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
Overview
1 LED
2 Programmable keys
3 Hand-held transmitters of the system
Programming
General information
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Press and hold the left and right button on
the interior rearview mirror simultaneously
Seite 146
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
for approximately 20 seconds until the LED
on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This
erases all programming of the buttons on
the interior rearview mirror.
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in‐
ches/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of
the interior rearview mirror. The required
distance depends on the manual transmit‐
ter.
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button
of the desired function on the hand-held
transmitter and the button to be program‐
med on the interior rearview mirror. The
LED on the interior rearview mirror will be‐
gin flashing slowly.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing
faster indicates that the button on the inte‐
rior rearview mirror has been programmed.
If the LED does not flash faster after at least
60 seconds, change the distance between
the interior rearview mirror and the hand-
held transmitter and repeat the step. Sev‐
eral more attempts at different distances
may be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds
between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior rearview mirror button
and repeatedly press and release the hand-
held transmitter button for 2 seconds.
6.
To program other functions on other but‐
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
The systems can be controlled using the interior
rearview mirror buttons.
Special feature of the alternating-code
wireless system
If you are unable to operate the system after
repeated programming, please check if the sys‐
tem to be controlled features an alternating-
code radio system.
Read the system's operating manual, or press
the programmed button on the interior rear‐
view mirror longer. If the LED on the interior
mirror starts flashing rapidly and then stays lit
constantly for 2 seconds, the system features
an alternating-code radio system. Flashing and
continuous illumination of the LED will repeat
for approximately 20 seconds.
For systems with an alternating-code radio sys‐
tem, the universal remote control and the sys‐
tem also have to be synchronized.
Please read the operating manual to find out
how to synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second
person.
Synchronizing the universal remote control
with the system:
1.
Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
mote-controlled system.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior
rearview mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the system being programmed. You
have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the
interior rearview mirror for approximately
3 seconds and then release it. If necessary,
repeat this step up to three times in order
to finish synchronization. Once synchroni‐
zation is complete, the programmed func‐
tion will be carried out.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror
button to be programmed.
3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED
starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held
transmitter for the system to be controlled
approx. 1 to 3 inches/2.5 to 8 cm away
from the buttons of the interior rearview
mirror. The required distance depends on
the manual transmitter.
Seite 147
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the
desired function on the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the interior
rearview mirror LED flashes more rapidly.
The LED flashing faster indicates that the
button on the interior rearview mirror has
been programmed. The system can then be
controlled by the button on the interior
rearview mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at least
60 seconds, change the distance and re‐
peat the step. Several more attempts at dif‐
ferent distances may be necessary. Wait at
least 15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior rearview mirror button
and repeatedly press and release the hand-
held transmitter button for 2 seconds.
Controls
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, for example the
garage door, using the integrated universal re‐
mote control. There is risk of injuries or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety instructions of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.◀
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior rear‐
view mirror while the engine is running or
when the ignition is started. To do this, hold
down the button within receiving range of the
system until the function is activated. The inte‐
rior rearview mirror LED stays lit while the wire‐
less signal is being transmitted.
Deleting stored functions
Press and hold the left and right button on the
interior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐
proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes
rapidly. All stored functions will be deleted. The
functions cannot be deleted individually.
Digital compass
Overview
1 Control button
2 Mirror display
Mirror display
The point of the compass is displayed in the
mirror when driving straight.
Operating concept
Various functions can be called up by pressing
the control button with a pointed object, such
as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object.
The following setting options are displayed in
succession, depending on how long the control
button is pressed:
▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering
setting.
▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
Setting the compass zones
Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐
cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐
fer to World map with compass zones.
Seite 148
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure
1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the set
compass zone appears in the mirror.
2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐
trol button quickly and repeatedly until the
number of the compass zone that corre‐
sponds with your location appears in the
mirror.
The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐
pass is ready for use again after approximately
10 seconds.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
event of the following:
▷ The wrong compass point is displayed.
▷ The point of the compass displayed does
not change despite changing the direction
of travel.
▷ Not all points of the compass are displayed.
Procedure
1. Make sure that there are no large metallic
objects or overhead power lines near the
vehicle and that there is sufficient room to
drive around in a circle.
2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
3. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears on
the display. Next, drive in a complete circle
at least once at a speed of no more than
4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is successful,
the "C" is replaced by the points of the
compass.
Left/right-hand steering
The digital compass is already set for right or
left-hand steering at the factory.
Setting the language
Press and hold the control button for approx.
12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control but‐
ton again to switch between English "E" and
German "O".
Seite 149
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Settings are stored automatically after approxi‐
mately 10 seconds.
Sun visor
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐
hind a cover.
When the cover is opened, the mirror lighting
switches on.
Ashtray/cigarette
lighter
Overview
The ashtray is located in one of the frontal cup
holders, the cigarette lighter above it in the
center console.
Ashtray
In order to empty the ashtray, remove the ash‐
tray from the cupholder.
Lighter
WARNING
Contact with hot heating elements or the
hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause
burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the
cigarette lighter falls down or is held against
the respective objects. There is risk of fire and
injuries. Hold the cigarette lighter on its handle.
Make sure that children do not use the ciga‐
rette lighter and do not burn themselves, for
example by carrying the remote control along
when exiting the vehicle.◀
CAUTION
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.◀
Push in the lighter.
The lighter can be removed as
soon as it pops back out.
Connecting electrical de‐
vices
Information
WARNING
Devices and cables in the unfolding area
of the airbags, for example portable navigation
devices, etc., can hinder the unfolding of the
airbag or be thrown around in the car's interior
when unfolding. There is risk of injuries. make
sure that devices and cables are not in the air‐
bag's area of unfolding.◀
CAUTION
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is
risk of property damage. Only connect battery
chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting
aid terminals in the engine compartment.◀
Seite 150
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
CAUTION
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.◀
Sockets
Sockets can be used for the running electrical
devices with the engine running or with the ig‐
nition switched on. The total load of all sockets
must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors.
In the front center console
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
In the rear center console
Remove the cover.
In the trunk
The socket is located on the right side in the
trunk.
USB interface
The concept
Connection for USB devices with music files and
for importing data, such as for Personal Profile
settings.
Information
Observe the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
lights to the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect any USB hard drives or USB
hubs.
▷ Do not use the USB interface for recharging
external devices.
Seite 151
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Overview
The USB interface is located in the front of the
center console.
Cargo area
Cargo cover
Information
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, for example mobile
phones, can be thrown into the car's interior
while driving, for example in the event of an
accident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is risk of injuries. Secure loose ob‐
jects or devices with a cable connection to the
vehicle in the car's interior.◀
Closing
CAUTION
A cargo cover hooked in incorrectly can
cause damage. There is risk of property dam‐
age. Hook the cargo cover on both sides.◀
Pull out the cargo cover, arrow 1, and hook
both sides into the brackets, arrow 2.
Opening
WARNING
A cargo cover that snaps back quickly can
jam body parts or cause damage. There is risk
of injuries or risk of property damage. Do not
let the cargo cover snap back into place.◀
Pull over the cargo cover and hook into the
brackets on both sides.
Removing
For storing bulky objects the cargo cover can
be removed.
Press the release button, arrow 1, and pull the
cargo cover out towards the rear, arrow 2.
Installing
Slide the cargo cover in until it engages on both
sides with an audible click.
Seite 152
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Enlarging the trunk
The concept
The trunk can be enlarged by folding down the
rear seat backrest.
Without through-loading system: The rear
backrest is divided 60–40. The backrest of the
left seat is connected to the backrest center
section.
With through-loading system: the rear seat
backrest is divided into three parts at a
40/20/40 ratio.
The sides can be folded down separately or to‐
gether.
Information
WARNING
Danger of jamming with folding down the
backrests. There is risk of injuries or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the rear backrest is clear prior to
folding down.◀
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust
the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and
correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged. If possible,
adjust the height of the head restraints or re‐
move them.◀
WARNING
With an unlocked backrest, an unsecured
load can be thrown into the car's interior, for
example in case of an accident, braking or eva‐
sive maneuver. There is risk of injuries. Make
sure that the backrest engages into the locking
after folding it back.◀
WARNING
With a rear backrest that is not locked,
the protective function of the middle safety belt
is not guaranteed. There is risk of injuries or
danger to life. If you are using the middle safety
belt, lock the wider rear backrest.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is risk of injuries.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear
when moving the head restraint.◀
Folding down rear seat backrests
The rear seat backrest can be folded down
from the front or from the trunk.
The right backrest can be folded down sepa‐
rately. The left backrest can be folded down in
combination with the middle section. Fold in
the middle head restraint.
Reach into the recess and fold forward.
Folding down the middle section
1.
Fold in the middle head restraint.
Seite 153
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
2. Reach into the recess and pull the middle
section forward.
Folding back the backrest
WARNING
With an unlocked backrest, an unsecured
load can be thrown into the car's interior, for
example in case of an accident, braking or eva‐
sive maneuver. There is risk of injuries. Make
sure that the backrest engages into the locking
after folding it back.◀
Fold up the backrest and press it into the latch.
Make sure that the safety belt is not pinched.
Adjusting the backrest tilt
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust
the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and
correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged. If possible,
adjust the height of the head restraints or re‐
move them.◀
To transport bulky items, the trunk can be ex‐
panded by setting the backrests at a steeper
angle.
1.
Release the backrest, and tilt it forward.
2. Fold the frame up until it engages.
3. Fold back and engage the rear seat back‐
rest.
Seite 154
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐
tive features and systems.
Information
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, for example mobile
phones, can be thrown into the car's interior
while driving, for example in the event of an
accident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is risk of injuries. Secure loose ob‐
jects or devices with a cable connection to the
vehicle in the car's interior.◀
CAUTION
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Do not use anti-slip pads.◀
Overview
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the vehicle interior:
▷ Storage compartment in front of the cu‐
pholders.
▷ Storage tray in the center console.
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side.
▷ Storage compartment in the center arm‐
rest.
▷ Compartments in the doors.
▷ Pockets on the backrests of the front seats.
▷ Storage compartments in the trunk
Glove compartment
Information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment
protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in the
glove compartment can be thrown into the
car's interior while driving, for example in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers. There is risk of injuries. Always
close the glove compartment immediately after
using it.◀
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment switches
on.
Closing
Fold up the cover.
Seite 155
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Compartments in the
doors
WARNING
Breakable object, for example glass bot‐
tle, can break in the event of an accident. Bro‐
ken glass can be scattered in the car's interior.
There is risk of injuries. Do not stow any break‐
able objects in the car's interior.◀
Center armrest
Two cupholders are located in the center arm‐
rest.
Opening
Upper storage compartment: press button, ar‐
row 1, and fold the center armrest up, arrow 2.
Lower storage compartment: press button, ar‐
row 1, and fold the center armrest up, arrow 2.
Cupholders
Information
WARNING
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder
and hot beverages can damage the cup holder
and increase the risk of injuries in the event of
an accident. There is risk of injuries or risk of
property damage. Use light-weight, unbreaka‐
ble, and sealable containers. Do not transport
hot beverages. Do not force objects into the
cup holder.◀
Front
In the center console.
Rear
In the center armrest.
Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.
To open: press the button.
To close: push both covers back in, one after
the other.
Seite 156
CONTROLS
Storage compartments
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
CAUTION
With an open cup holder, the center arm‐
rest cannot be folded back up. There is risk of
property damage. Press back the covers before
the center armrest is folded up.◀
Clothes hooks
WARNING
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can
obstruct the view while driving. There is risk of
an accident. When suspending clothing articles
from the hooks, ensure that they will not ob‐
struct the driver's view.◀
WARNING
Improper use of the clothes hooks can
lead to a danger of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is risk of
injuries and risk of property damage. Only hang
lightweight objects, for example clothing arti‐
cles, from the clothes hooks.◀
The clothes hooks are located above the rear
doors.
Storage compartments in
the trunk
Side storage compartments, left and
right
Storage compartments are located on the left
and right sides.
Storage compartments in the split
doors
There are storage compartments in the split
doors.
Multi-function hook
WARNING
Improper use of the multifunction hooks
can lead to a danger of objects flying about
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is
risk of injuries and risk of property damage.
Only hang lightweight objects, for example
shopping bags, from the multifunction hooks.
Only transport heavy luggage in the cargo area
if it has been appropriately secured.◀
A multi-function hook is available on the right
side of the cargo area.
Retaining strap
A retaining strap is available on the left side
trim for fastening small objects.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
To secure the cargo, refer to page 166, there
are lashing eyes in the trunk.
Variable trunk floor
With the variable trunk floor, the trunk can be
configured corresponding to transport require‐
ments. To do this, remove the trunk floor, and
insert it in the desired position.
Follow instructions on securing cargo, refer to
page 165.
Seite 157
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Removing the cargo floor panel
1. Fold the rear part of the cargo floor panel
upward.
2. Grasp the cargo floor panel in the rear and
fold slightly upward.
3. Pull the cargo floor panel backward from
the brackets.
Folding up the cargo floor panel
WARNING
Improper use of the variable cargo floor
panel can lead to a danger of objects flying
about during braking and evasive maneuvers.
There is risk of injuries and risk of property
damage.
▷ Do not use the variable cargo floor panel to
separate the cargo area and vehicle interior
in the sense of a partition net.
▷ Only use the variable cargo floor in the
folded-up position when the backrests are
folded up and locked.
▷ Always secure cargo against shifting, using
straps, belts and lashing eyes, for exam‐
ple.◀
Fold the rear part of the cargo floor panel up‐
ward.
Fold up the cargo floor panel and press behind
the locks on the left and right, arrow. You've
reached the maximum cargo height.
Seite 158
CONTROLS
Storage compartments
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Seite 159
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
DRIVE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐
tive features and systems.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need time to adjust to one an‐
other (break-in time).
The following instructions will help accomplish
a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
During break-in, do not use the Launch Control,
refer to page 77.
Information
WARNING
Due to new parts and components, safety
and driver assistance systems can react with a
delay. There is risk of an accident. After instal‐
ling new parts or with a new vehicle, drive con‐
servatively and interfere early if necessary. Ob‐
serve the break-in procedures of the respective
parts and components.◀
Engine, transmission, and axle drive
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
speed:
▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐
stances.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimal per‐
formance between brake discs and brake pads.
Drive moderately during this break-in period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
level only after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
engage the clutch gently.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be ob‐
served if any of the components above-men‐
tioned have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
Seite 162
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
General driving notes
Closing split doors
WARNING
An open split door protrudes from the ve‐
hicle and can endanger occupants and other
road users or damage the vehicle in the event
of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers.
In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the vehi‐
cle interior. There is risk of injuries or risk of
property damage. Do not drive with split doors
open.◀
If nevertheless you need to drive with split
doors open:
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
▷ Drive moderately.
Hot exhaust system
WARNING
During driving operation, high tempera‐
tures can occur underneath the body, for ex‐
ample caused by the exhaust gas system. If
combustible materials, such as leaves or grass,
come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust
gas system, these materials can ignite. There is
risk of injuries or risk of property damage.
Do not remove the heat shields installed and
never apply undercoating to them. Make sure
that no combustible materials can come in con‐
tact with hot vehicle parts in driving operation,
idle or during parking. Do not touch the hot ex‐
haust system.◀
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
WARNING
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones
can influence one another. There is radiation
due to the send operations of mobile phones.
There is risk of injuries or risk of property dam‐
age. If possible, in the car's interior use only
mobile phones with direct connections to an
exterior antenna in order to exclude mutual
disturbance and deflect the radiation from the
car's interior.◀
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Driving through water
CAUTION
When driving too quickly through too
deep water, water can enter into the engine
compartment, the electrical system or the
transmission. There is risk of property damage.
When driving through water, do not exceed the
maximum indicated water level and the maxi‐
mum speed for driving through water.◀
When driving through water, observe the fol‐
lowing:
▷ Drive through calm water only.
▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper
than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm.
▷ Drive through water no faster than walking
speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
Braking safely
Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature.
Perform an emergency stop in situations that
require such.
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid
any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐
fort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
active mode.
Seite 163
Things to remember when driving
DRIVING TIPS
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Objects in the area around the pedals
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is risk of an accident. Stow objects in the
vehicle such that they are secured and cannot
enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats
that are suitable for the vehicle and can be
safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose
floor mats and do not layer several floor mats.
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for
the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are se‐
curely fastened again after they were removed,
for example for cleaning.◀
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain,
press brake pedal ever so gently every few
miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger other
traffic.
The heat generated in this process helps dry
the brake discs and pads.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
Hills
WARNING
Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out
and possibly even brake failure. There is risk of
an accident. Avoid placing excessive stress on
the brake system.◀
WARNING
In idle or with the engine switched off,
safety-relevant functions are restricted or not
available anymore, for example braking effect
of the engine or braking force and steering
support. There is risk of an accident. Do not
drive in idle or with the engine switched off.◀
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear that requires least braking efforts. Other‐
wise the brakes may overheat and reduce
brake efficiency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if
needed.
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐
tion on the brake pads are furthered by:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
Corrosion will built up when the maximum
pressure applied to the brake pads during brak‐
ing is not reached - thus discs don't get
cleaned.
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause
a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐
sponse - generally that cannot be corrected.
Condensation under the parked vehicle
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water develops collecting under‐
neath the vehicle.
Ground clearance
CAUTION
If ground clearance is insufficient, there
might be contact with the front or rear spoiler
for example when driving over curbs or enter‐
ing into underground car parking garages.
There is risk of property damage. Ensure that
there is sufficient ground clearance available.◀
Seite 164
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Loading
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐
tive features and systems.
Information
WARNING
High gross weight can overheat the tires,
damage them, and cause a sudden drop in tire
inflation pressure. There is risk of an accident.
Pay attention to the permitted load capacity of
the tires and never exceed the permitted gross
weight.◀
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, for example mobile
phones, can be thrown into the car's interior
while driving, for example in the event of an
accident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is risk of injuries. Secure loose ob‐
jects or devices with a cable connection to the
vehicle in the car's interior.◀
CAUTION
Fluids in the cargo area can cause dam‐
age. There is risk of property damage. Make
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.◀
CAUTION
The cargo floor panel is designed for a
particular maximum weight. Weight that is too
high and that is selective can damage the cargo
floor panel. There is risk of property damage.
Do not exceed the maximum load of the cargo
area floor and evenly distribute the cargo
across the cargo area floor.
The maximum load is 881 lbs/440 kg.◀
Determining the load
limit
1.
Locate the following statement on your ve‐
hicle’s placard:
▷ The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the ve‐
hicle and unstable driving situations
may result.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY
pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity.
Seite 165
Loading
DRIVING TIPS
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs pas‐
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs =
400 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
Load
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing cargo
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
the rear passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow cargo.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of
the backrests.
Securing cargo
Information
WARNING
Improperly stowed objects can shift and
be thrown into the car's interior, for example in
the event of an accident or during braking and
evasive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be
hit and injured. There is risk of injuries. Stow
and secure objects and cargo properly.◀
▷ Small and light cargo: secure with retaining
straps or draw straps.
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
straps.
Attach the cargo straps, retaining straps or
draw straps to the lashing eyes in the cargo
area.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
With storage package: to secure the cargo
there are four lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Roof-mounted luggage
rack
Information
Installation only possible with roof rack.
Seite 166
DRIVING TIPS
Loading
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Roof racks are available as special accessories.
Securing
Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.
Loading
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of
gravity when loaded, they have a major effect
on vehicle handling and steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading and
driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐
tained for tilting and opening the glass sun‐
roof.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie with
ratchet straps.
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐
ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners
gently.
Seite 167
Loading
DRIVING TIPS
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐
tive features and systems.
General information
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐
sions.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
The implementation of certain measures, driv‐
ing style and regular maintenance can influ‐
ence fuel consumption and environmental im‐
pact.
Remove unnecessary
cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts
following use
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof-mounted or rear
luggage racks which are no longer required fol‐
lowing use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Close the windows and
glass sunroof
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
open results in increased air resistance and
raises fuel consumption.
Tires
General information
Tires can affect fuel consumption in various
ways, for example, tire size may influence fuel
consumption.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before
starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Drive away without de‐
lay
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the fastest way for the cold engine to
reach its operating temperature.
Look well ahead when
driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
Seite 168
DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you.
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
consumption.
Avoid high engine speeds
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Use 1st gear to get the vehicle moving. Starting
with the 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When ac‐
celerating, shift up before reaching high engine
speeds.
When you reach the desired speed, shift into
the highest applicable gear and drive with the
engine speed as low as possible and at a con‐
stant speed.
The gear shift indicator, refer to page 86, of
your vehicle indicates the most fuel efficient
gear.
Use coasting conditions
When approaching a red light, take your foot
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a
halt.
For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐
erator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine
during longer stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, for
example, at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in
traffic congestion.
Auto Start/Stop function
The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle au‐
tomatically switches off the engine during a
stop.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted
rather than leaving the engine running con‐
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are re‐
duced. Savings can begin within a few seconds
of switching off the engine.
In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐
mined by other factors, such as driving style,
road conditions, maintenance or environmental
factors.
Switch off any functions
that are not currently
needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy and
consume additional fuel, especially in city and
stop-and-go traffic.
Therefore, switch off these functions if they are
not actually needed.
Have maintenance car‐
ried out
Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. MINI
recommends that maintenance work be per‐
formed by a MINI service center.
Also note the MINI maintenance systems, refer
to page 201.
GREEN Mode
The concept
The GREEN Mode supports a driving style that
saves on fuel consumption. For this purpose,
the engine control and comfort features, e. g.
the climate control output, are adjusted.
For Steptronic transmission:
Seite 169
Saving fuel
DRIVING TIPS
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
The Coasting driving condition is enabled under
certain conditions.
Under certain conditions the engine is auto‐
matically decoupled from the transmission in
selector lever position D. The vehicle continues
traveling with the engine idling to reduce fuel
consumption. Selector lever position D remains
engaged. An indicator provides information
about the distance traveled in Coasting mode.
In addition, context-sensitive instructions are
displayed to assist with an optimized fuel con‐
sumption driving style.
The achieved extended range is displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Overview
The system includes the following MINIMAL
functions and displays:
▷ GREEN bonus range, refer to page 171.
▷ GREEN tips driving instruction, refer to
page 171.
▷ GREEN climate control, refer to page 170.
▷ MINIMALISM analyzer, refer to page 173.
▷ Coasting driving condition, refer to
page 172.
Activating GREEN Mode
Turn Driving Dynamics Control to
the right until GREEN Mode is
displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter.
Configuring GREEN Mode
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
1.
Activating GREEN Mode.
2. "Configure GREEN"
3. Configure the program.
Via onboard monitor:
1.
"Settings"
2. "GREEN Mode"
Or
1. "Settings"
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Configure GREEN"
Configure the program.
GREEN tip
▷ "Tip at:"
Set the GREEN Mode speed at which a
GREEN Mode tip is to be displayed.
▷ "GREEN speed warning":
Displays a reminder when the set GREEN
Mode speed is exceeded.
Coasting
Fuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengag‐
ing the engine and Coasting, refer to page 172,
with the engine idling.
This function is only available in GREEN Mode.
GREEN climate control
"GREEN climate control"
Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient.
By making a slight change to the set tempera‐
ture, or adjusting the rate of heating or cooling
of the car's interior fuel consumption can be
economized.
The outputs of the seat heater and the exterior
Additionally heat output to seats and exterior
mirror is reduced.
Exterior mirror heat is available when outside
temperatures are very low.
GREEN potential
The percentage of potential savings that can be
achieved with the current configuration is dis‐
played.
Seite 170
DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Display in the instrument cluster
GREEN bonus range
An adjusted driving style helps
you extend your driving range.
This may be displayed as the bo‐
nus range in the instrument clus‐
ter.
The bonus range is shown in the range display.
The bonus range is automatically reset every
time the vehicle is refueled.
▷ Green display: efficient driving style.
▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by
backing off the accelerator pedal.
Driving style
A bar display in the instrument
cluster indicates your current
driving efficiency.
Mark in the left area, arrow 1:
display for energy recovered by
coasting or when braking.
Mark in the right area, arrow 2: display when
accelerating.
Your driving style's efficiency is shown by the
bar's color:
▷ Green display: efficient driving style as long
as the mark moves within the green range.
▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by
backing off the accelerator pedal.
The display switches to green as soon as all
conditions for fuel-efficiency-optimized driving
are met.
GREEN tip driving instruction
Instructions tell you to switch to a more fuel-ef‐
ficient driving style when you back off the ac‐
celerator.
Information
The driving style display and GREEN Mode tips
in the instrument cluster appear when the
GREEN Mode display is activated.
Activating driving style and GREEN Mode tips:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. "GREEN Info"
GREEN tip symbols
An additional symbol and text instructions are
displayed.
Symbol Measure
For efficient driving back off the ac‐
celerator or delay accelerating to al‐
low time to assess road conditions.
Reduce speed to the selected GREEN
speed.
Steptronic transmission: switch from
M/S to D or avoid manual shift inter‐
ventions.
Seite 171
Saving fuel
DRIVING TIPS
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Symbol Measure
Manual transmission: follow shifting
instructions.
Manual transmission: engage neutral
for engine stop.
Indications on the Control Display
MINIMALISM
Information on fuel consumption and technol‐
ogy can be displayed while driving.
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "MINIMALISM"
Displaying MINIMALISM info
The current efficiency can be displayed.
"MINIMALISM info"
The following systems are displayed:
▷ Auto Start/Stop function.
▷ Energy recovery.
▷ Climate control output.
▷ Coasting.
Displaying GREEN Mode tips
"GREEN tips"
Driving instruction and an additional symbol
are displayed.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Coasting
The concept
The system helps to conserve fuel.
To do this, under certain conditions the engine
is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐
sion when selector lever position D is set. The
vehicle continues traveling with the engine
idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector
lever position D remains engaged.
This driving condition is referred to as coasting.
As soon as the brake or accelerator pedal is de‐
pressed, the engine is automatically coupled to
the transmission again.
Information
Coasting is a component of the GREEN driving
mode, refer to page 169.
Coasting is automatically activated when
GREEN Mode is called via the Driving Dynamics
Control, refer to page 119.
The function is available in a certain speed
range.
A proactive driving style helps the driver to use
the function as often as possible and supports
the fuel-conserving effect of coasting.
Safety mode
The function is not available under one of the
following conditions.
▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on
steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low
or vehicle electrical system drawing exces‐
sive current.
▷ Cruise control activated.
Functional requirements
In GREEN Mode, this function is available in a
speed range from approximately 30 mph, ap‐
prox. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h,
if the following conditions are met:
▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not
operated.
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
tion D.
▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
temperature.
Seite 172
DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Display
Display in the instrument cluster
The mark in the bar display be‐
low the tachometer is high‐
lighted green and appears at the
zero point. The tachometer ap‐
proximately indicates idle speed.
Indications on the Control Display
The Coasting driving condition is displayed in
MINIMALISM Info while this driving mode is ac‐
tive.
The distance traveled in the Coasting driving
condition is indicated by a counter.
Color code green, arrow 1: distance traveled in
the Coasting driving condition. Symbol, ar‐
row 2: coasting driving condition.
Displaying MINIMALISM info
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "MINIMALISM"
3. "MINIMALISM info"
Deactivating the system manually
The function can be deactivated in the Config‐
ure GREEN Mode, refer to page 170, menu, for
example, to use the braking effect of the en‐
gine when traveling downhill.
Settings are saved for the profile currently be‐
ing used.
MINIMALISM driving style analysis
The concept
In this situation the system helps develop an
especially efficient driving style and to conserve
fuel.
For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.
The assessment is done in various categories
and is displayed on the Control Display.
Using this indication, the individual driving style
can be oriented toward conserving fuel.
The last fifteen minutes of a trip are evaluated.
The range of the vehicle can be extended by an
efficient driving style. This gain in range is dis‐
played as a bonus range in the instrument clus‐
ter and on the Control Display.
Functional requirement
The function is only available in GREEN Mode.
Calling up MINIMALISM Analyser
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
1.
Activate GREEN Mode.
2. "MINIMALISM"
3. Select the symbol.
Display
Display on the Control Display
The display of the MINIMALISM Analyser con‐
sists of a fish, which is riding along in a glass of
water on the roof of the MINI and a table of
values that rates the driving style in various cat‐
Seite 173
Saving fuel
DRIVING TIPS
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
egories. The bonus range achieved by driving
style that minimizes fuel consumption is dis‐
played below the table of values.
The fish and the movements of the water in the
glass symbolize the efficiency of the driving
style. The more efficient the driving style, the
less the water sloshes around in the glass and
the better is the fish's mood, arrow 1.
The table of values contains stars, arrow 2. The
more efficient the driving style, the more stars
are included in the table and the faster the bo‐
nus range increases, arrow 3.
If by contrast the driving style is inefficient, the
water oscillates, the mood of the fish is sullied
and a reduced number of asterisks is displayed.
To assist with an efficient driving style, GREEN
tips are displayed during driving.
Tips about the energy saving driving style, Con‐
serving fuel, refer to page 168.
Seite 174
DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Seite 175
Saving fuel
DRIVING TIPS
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
MOVE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Refueling
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐
tive features and systems.
Information
Observe the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 180, prior to refueling.
CAUTION
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not ensured
anymore. There is risk of property damage. Re‐
fuel promptly.◀
Fuel lid
Opening
1.
Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached
to the fuel filler flap.
Closing
1.
Fit the lid and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
WARNING
The retaining strap of the fuel cap be
jammed and crushed during closing. In this
case, the lid cannot be correctly closed and fuel
vapors or fuel can escape. There is risk of inju‐
ries or risk of property damage. Pay attention
that the retaining strap is not jammed or
crushed when closing the lid.◀
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
E. g. in the event of an electrical malfunction.
Seite 178
MOBILITY
Refueling
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
The release is located behind the right side of
the split doors.
1. Opening split doors fully.
2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump
symbol. This releases the fuel filler flap.
3. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap. Fuel filler flap is opened.
Observe the following
when refueling
CAUTION
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling
of the fuel tank can damage the fuel system.
On contact with painted surfaces, damage may
occur to these surfaces. The environment is
polluted. There is risk of property damage.
Avoid overfilling.◀
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Observe safety regulations posted at the gas
station.
Seite 179
Refueling
MOBILITY
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Fuel
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐
tive features and systems.
Fuel recommendation
General information
Depending on the region, many gas stations
sell fuel that has been customized to winter or
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in
winter helps make a cold start easier, for exam‐
ple.
Information
CAUTION
Even fuels that conform to the specifica‐
tions can be of low quality. This may cause en‐
gine problems, for instance poor engine start-
up behavior, poor handling and/or poor
performance. There is risk of property damage.
In case of engine problems, switch gas stations
or use a brand name fuel with a higher octane
rating.◀
Gasoline
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used.
CAUTION
Even small amounts of wrong fuel or
wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel sys‐
tem and the engine. Furthermore, the catalytic
converter is permanently damaged. There is
risk of property damage. Do not refuel or add
the following in the case of gasoline engines:
▷ Leaded gasoline.
▷ Metallic additives, for example manganese
or iron.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refuel‐
ing.
Ethanol should satisfy the following quality
standards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
CAUTION
Wrong fuels can damage the fuel system
and the engine. There is risk of property dam‐
age. Do not use a fuel with a higher ethanol
percentage than recommended or one with
other types of alcohol, for example M5 to
M100.◀
Recommended fuel grade
MINI recommends AKI 91.
Minimum fuel grade
MINI recommends AKI 89.
Seite 180
MOBILITY
Fuel
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
CAUTION
Fuel that does not comply with the mini‐
mum quality can compromise engine function
or cause engine damage. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Do not fill with fuel that does not
comply with the minimum quality.◀
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
CAUTION
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐
ally, problems relating to drivability, starting
and stalling, especially under certain environ‐
mental conditions such as high ambient tem‐
perature and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pur‐
chase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled mainte‐
nance.◀
Seite 181
Fuel
MOBILITY
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐
tive features and systems.
Tire inflation pressure
Safety information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐
sure influence the following:
▷ The service life of the tires.
▷ Road safety.
▷ Driving comfort.
Checking the tire inflation pressure
WARNING
A tire with low or missing tire inflation
pressure impacts handling, such as steering
and braking response. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Regularly check the tire inflation pressure,
and correct it as needed, for example twice a
month and before a long trip.◀
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire infla‐
tion pressure.
Tires heat up while driving, and the tire inflation
pressure increases along with the tire's temper‐
ature. The tire inflation pressure specifications
relate to cold tires or tires with the ambient
temperature.
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after driving no more
than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours.
The displays of inflation devices may under-
read by up to 0.1 bar.
For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tire
inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire Moni‐
tor.
For Tire Pressure Monitor: after correcting the
tire inflation pressure, reset the Tire Pressure
Monitor.
▷ Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
▷ Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 183, contains all tire inflation pressure
specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
ambient temperature. The tire inflation pres‐
sure values apply to tire sizes approved by the
manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle
type.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/
160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
to page 183, and adjust as necessary.
Seite 182
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
These pressure values can also be found on the
tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door
pillar.
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Tire inflation pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h
COOPER
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
205/55 R 16 91 V M
+S A/S RSC
205/55 R 16 91 W
RSC
205/55 R 16 91 H M
+S RSC
225/45 R 17 91 V M
+S A/S RSC
225/45 R 17 94 W
XL Std
225/45 R 17 91 W
RSC
225/45 R 17 91 H M
+S RSC
2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
195/55 R 17 92 H M
+S XL Std
225/40 R 18 92 Y
XL RSC
225/40 R 18 92 V M
+S XL RSC
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
225/35 R 19 88 Y
XL RSC
2.6 / 38 2.7 / 39
Emergency wheel
T 125/70 R 17 98 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
COOPER S
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
195/55 R 17 92 H
M+S XL Std
225/45 R 17 91 V M
+S A/S RSC
225/45 R 17 91 W
RSC
225/45 R 17 91 H
M+S RSC
2.4 / 35 2.2 / 32
225/40 R 18 92 V M
+S XL RSC
225/40 R 18 92 Y
XL RSC
2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35
225/35 R 19 88 Y
XL RSC
2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41
Seite 183
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds
above 100 mph/160 km/h
WARNING
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,
and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the
relevant table on the following pages. Other‐
wise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀
Tire inflation pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h
COOPER
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
205/55 R 16 91 V M
+S A/S RSC
205/55 R 16 91 W
RSC
205/55 R 16 91 H M
+S RSC
225/45 R 17 91 V M
+S A/S RSC
225/45 R 17 91 W
RSC
225/45 R 17 94 W
XL Std
225/45 R 17 91 H M
+S RSC
225/40 R 18 92 Y
XL RSC
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
195/55 R 17 92 H M
+S XL Std
225/40 R 18 92 V M
+S XL RSC
2.5 / 36 2.7 / 39
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
225/35 R 19 88 Y
XL RSC
2.6 / 38 2.7 / 39
Emergency wheel
T 125/70 R 17 98 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
COOPER S
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
195/55 R 17 92 H
M+S XL Std
225/45 R 17 91 W
RSC
225/45 R 17 91 H
M+S RSC
225/45 R 17 91 V
M+S A/S RSC
225/40 R 18 92 Y
XL RSC
2.7 / 39 2.5 / 36
225/35 R 19 88 Y
XL RSC
225/40 R 18 92 V
M+S XL RSC
3.0 / 44 2.8 / 41
Emergency wheel
T 125/70 R 17 98
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Tire identification marks
Tire size
205/45 R 17 84 V
205: nominal width in mm
Seite 184
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
17: rim diameter in inches
84: load rating, not for ZR tires
F: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Speed letter
T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 3615
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
3615: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age
DOT … 3615: the tire was manufactured in the
1st week of 2015.
Recommendation
Regardless of wear and tear, replace tires at
least every 6 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA;
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal
Safety Requirements in addition to these
grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as
well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, how‐
ever, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under control‐
led conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering, hy‐
droplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi‐
cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A
represent higher levels of performance on the
Seite 185
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐
quired by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.◀
RSC – Run-flat tires
Run-flat tires, refer to page 188, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the sidewall.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.12 inches/3 mm.
There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if
the tread depth is less than 0.12 inches/3 mm.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.16 inches/4 mm.
Below a tread depth of 0.16 inches/4 mm, tires
are less suitable for winter operation.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's
circumference and have the legally required
minimum height of 0.063 inches/1.6 mm.
They are marked on the side of the tire with
TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Information
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can
cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐
pension parts. This is more likely to occur with
low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning
between the wheel and the road. Be careful to
avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐
pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-
profile tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
functions:
▷ Unusual vibrations while driving.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
dency to pull to the left or right.
Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over
curbs, road damage, or similar things.
Seite 186
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres‐
sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle control.
There is risk of an accident. If tire damage is
suspected while driving, immediately reduce
speed and stop. Have wheels and tires
checked. For this purpose, drive carefully to the
nearest dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop. Have
vehicle towed or transported as needed.◀
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres‐
sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle control.
There is risk of an accident. Do not repair dam‐
aged tires, but have them replaced.◀
Changing wheels and
tires
Mounting
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried
out by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Wheel and tire combination
You can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
about the right wheel/tire combination and
wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair
the function of a variety of systems such as ABS
or DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.
WARNING
Wheels and tires which are not suitable
for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehi‐
cle, e.g. due to contact with the body due to
tolerances despite the same official size rating.
There is risk of an accident. The manufacturer
of your vehicle strongly suggests that you use
wheels and tires that have been recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle
type.◀
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of the vehi‐
cle recommends certain tire brands. These can
be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.
New tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
WARNING
Retreaded tires can have different tire
casing structures. With advanced age the serv‐
ice life can be limited. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. The manufacturer of your vehicle does
not recommend the use of retreaded tires.◀
Seite 187
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Winter tires
Winter tires are recommended for operating on
winter roads.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires provide
better winter traction than summer tires, they
do not provide the same level of performance
as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then a respective symbol is displayed in your
field of vision. The label is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
With mounted winter tires, observe and adhere
to the permissible maximum speed.
Run-flat tires
If you are already using run-flat tires, for your
own safety you should replace them only with
the same kind. No spare tire is available in the
case of a flat tire. Further information is availa‐
ble from a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Rotating wheels between axles
Different wear patterns can occur on the front
and rear axles depending on individual driving
conditions. The tires can be rotated between
the axles to achieve even wear. Further infor‐
mation is available from a dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or repair
shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure and
correct if needed.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Run-flat tires
Label
RSC label on the tire sidewall.
The wheels are composed of tires that are self-
supporting to a limited degree.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re‐
main drivable to a restricted degree in the
event of a tire inflation pressure loss.
Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to
page 109.
Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to
page 106.
Changing run-flat tires
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire.
A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer
additional questions at any time.
Repairing a flat tire
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead position
and engage the steering wheel lock.
Seite 188
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Mobility System
The concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage
can be sealed temporarily to enable continued
travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped
into the tires, which seals the damage from the
inside.
The compressor can be used to check the tire
inflation pressure.
Information
▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐
lity System found on the compressor and
sealant container.
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop if the
tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies
that have penetrated the tire.
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
container and apply it to the steering
wheel.
▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
wheel electronics. In this case, have the
electronics checked at the next opportunity
and have them replaced if needed.
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐
less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐
haust gases can also accumulate outside of the
vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the ex‐
haust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐
tion.◀
Storage
The Mobility System is in a bag in the front left
of the trunk.
Sealant container
▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.
▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
Observe use-by date on the sealant container.
Compressor
1 Bottle unlocking
2 Holder for bottle
3 Inflation pressure dial
4 Reduce inflation pressure
5 On/off switch
6 Compressor
Seite 189
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
7 Connector/cable for socket
8 Connection hose
Filling the tire with sealant
1. Shake the sealant container.
2. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover
of the sealant bottle. Do not kink the hose.
3. Slide the sealing container into the holder
on the compressor housing, ensuring that it
engages audibly.
4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer onto the tire valve of the nonworking
wheel.
5. With the compressor switched off, insert
the plug into the power socket inside the
vehicle.
6. With operating readiness switched on or
the engine running, switch on the compres‐
sor.
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to
fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire infla‐
tion pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the
tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach
approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor
at this point.
Seite 190
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
CAUTION
The compressor can overheat during ex‐
tended operation. There is risk of property
damage. Do not run the compressor for more
than 10 min.◀
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not
reached:
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Unscrew the filling hose from the wheel.
3. Drive forward and back to distribute the
sealant in the tire.
4. Inflate the tire again using the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be
reached, contact your dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Stowing the Mobility System
1.
Remove the connection hose of the sealant
container from the wheel.
2. After pressing the red unlock button on the
compressor, remove the sealing container.
3. Wrap the empty sealant container in suita‐
ble material to avoid dirtying the trunk.
4. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐
cle.
Distributing the sealant
Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to en‐
sure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the
tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.
To correct the tire inflation pressure
1. Stop at a suitable location.
2. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐
sor directly onto the tire valve stem.
3. Insert the connector into a power socket in‐
side the vehicle.
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at least
2.0 bar.
▷ Increase pressure: with the ignition
turned on or the engine running, switch
on the compressor.
▷ To reduce the pressure: press the but‐
ton on the compressor.
Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed
of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 108.
Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to
page 104.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant
container of the Mobility System as soon as
possible.
Seite 191
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
fine-link snow chains have been tested by the
manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
as road-safe and suitable.
Information regarding suitable snow chains is
available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Use
Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 195/60 R 16.
▷ 195/55 R 17.
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
tions.
Make sure that the snow chains are always suf‐
ficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed according
to the snow chain manufacturer's instructions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control if needed.
Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
when using snow chains.
Seite 192
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Engine compartment
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐
tive features and systems.
Important features in the engine comp.
1 Washer fluid reservoir
2 Vehicle identification number
3 Oil filler neck
4 Jump-starting, positive terminal
5 Jump-starting, negative terminal
6 Coolant reservoir
Hood
Information
WARNING
Improperly executed work in the engine
compartment can damage vehicle components
and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of
personal and property damage. The manufac‐
turer of your vehicle recommends that, in the
effort to avoid such risks, work in the engine
compartment be performed by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.◀
Seite 193
Engine compartment
MOBILITY
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
WARNING
The engine compartment accommodates
moving components. Certain components in
the engine compartment can also move with
the vehicle switched off, for example the cooler
fan. There is risk of injuries. Do not reach into
the area of moving parts. Keep articles of cloth‐
ing and hair away from moving parts.◀
WARNING
There are protruding parts, for example
lock hook, on the inside of the hood. There is
risk of injuries. If the hood is open, pay atten‐
tion to protruding parts and keep these areas
clear.◀
WARNING
An incorrectly locked hood can open
while driving and restrict visibility. There is risk
of an accident. Stop immediately and correctly
close the hood.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed on opening
and closing the hood. There is risk of injuries.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
hood is clear during opening and closing.◀
CAUTION
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Make sure that the wipers with
the wiper blades mounted are folded down
onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
Opening the hood
1.
Pull lever, arrow 1.
Hood is unlocked.
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever
again, arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
Indicator/warning lights
When the hood is opened, a Check Control
message is displayed.
Closing the hood
Let the hood fall from approx. 16 inches/40 cm,
arrow.
The hood must audibly engage on both sides.
Seite 194
MOBILITY
Engine compartment
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Engine oil
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐
tive features and systems.
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
the driving style and driving conditions.
The engine oil consumption can increase in the
following situations, for example:
▷ Sporty driving style.
▷ Break-in of the engine.
▷ Idling of the engine.
▷ With use of engine oil types that are classi‐
fied as not suitable.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling.
The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil
measurement.
The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐
uring principles:
▷ Status display.
▷ Detailed measurement.
Electronic oil measure‐
ment
Status display
The concept
The engine oil level is monitored electronically
while driving and shown on the Control Display.
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
level, a check control message is displayed.
Requirements
A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter
trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip is
displayed.
With frequent short-distance trips, perform a
detailed measurement.
Displaying the engine oil level
On the Control Display:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
Engine oil level display messages
Different messages appear on the display de‐
pending on the engine oil level. Pay attention
to these messages.
If the engine oil level is too low within the next
125 miles/200 km, add engine oil, refer to
page 196.
CAUTION
A too low engine oil level causes engine
damage. There is risk of property damage. Im‐
mediately add engine oil.◀
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Seite 195
Engine oil
MOBILITY
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
CAUTION
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is risk of
property damage. Do not add too much engine
oil. When too much engine oil is added, have oil
level corrected by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop.◀
Detailed measurement
The concept
In the detailed measurement the engine oil
level is checked when the vehicle is stationary,
and displayed via a scale.
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
level, a check control message is displayed.
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
creased somewhat.
Requirements
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral
position, clutch and accelerator pedals not
depressed.
▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in se‐
lector lever position N or P and accelerator
pedal not depressed.
▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐
perature.
Performing a detailed measurement
On the Control Display:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Measure engine oil level"
4. "Start measurement"
The engine oil level is checked and displayed
via a scale.
Time: approx. 1 minute.
Adding engine oil
Information
WARNING
Operating materials, for example oils,
greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harmful in‐
gredients. There is risk of injuries or danger to
life. Observe the instructions on the containers.
Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or
eyes with operating materials. Do not refill op‐
erating materials into different bottles. Store
operating materials out of reach of children.◀
CAUTION
A too low engine oil level causes engine
damage. There is risk of property damage.
Add engine oil within the next
125 miles/200 km.◀
CAUTION
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is risk of
property damage. Do not add too much engine
oil. When too much engine oil is added, have oil
level corrected by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop.◀
General information
Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. The quantity
to be added is indicated in the message dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi‐
cle before engine oil is added.
Overview
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐
partment, refer to page 193.
Opening the oil filler neck
1.
Open the hood, refer to page 193.
Seite 196
MOBILITY
Engine oil
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
2. Turn the oil filler neck counter-clockwise,
arrow.
3. Add engine oil.
After refilling, perform a detailed measure‐
ment, refer to page 196.
Engine oil types to add
Information
CAUTION
Oil additives can damage the engine.
There is risk of property damage. Do not use oil
additives.◀
CAUTION
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc‐
tions in the engine or damage it. There is risk of
property damage. When selecting an engine
oil, make sure that the engine oil has the cor‐
rect viscosity grade.◀
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the
engine.
Viscosity grades
Gasoline engine:
When selecting an engine oil, make sure that
the engine oil has the viscosity grade SAE
0W-20. Alternatively, also engine oils with vis‐
cosity grades SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-20, SAE
5W-30, SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 can be used.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Suitable engine oil types
Add engine oils that meet the following oil rat‐
ing standards:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Alternative engine oil types
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is
not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐
gine oil with the following oil rating can be
added:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01.
API SL or superior oil rating.
Engine oil change
CAUTION
Engine oil that is not changed in timely
fashion can cause increased engine wear and
thus engine damage. There is risk of property
damage. Do not exceed the service data indi‐
cated in the vehicle.◀
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop change
the engine oil.
Seite 197
Engine oil
MOBILITY
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Seite 198
MOBILITY
Engine oil
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Coolant
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐
tive features and systems.
Information
WARNING
With the engine hot and the cooling sys‐
tem open, coolant can escape and lead to
burns. There is risk of injuries. Only open the
cooling system with the engine cooled down.◀
WARNING
Additives are harmful and incorrect addi‐
tives can damage the engine. There is risk of in‐
juries and risk of property damage. Avoid the
contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes with
additives. Do not swallow any additives. Use
suitable additives only.◀
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for the vehicle. Information about suit‐
able additives is available from a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Coolant level
Overview
Open the hood, refer to page 193.
The coolant reservoir is in the engine compart‐
ment, refer to page 193.
Checking
There are yellow Min and Max marks in the
coolant reservoir.
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
sure to dissipate, then open it.
3. The coolant level is correct if it lies between
the minimum and maximum marks in the
filler neck.
Seite 199
Coolant
MOBILITY
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Adding
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
sure to dissipate, then open it.
3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up
to the specified level; do not overfill.
4. Close cap.
5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmen‐
tal protection regulations when dispos‐
ing of coolant and coolant additives.
Seite 200
MOBILITY
Coolant
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Maintenance
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐
tive features and systems.
MINI maintenance system
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides
support in maintaining road safety and the op‐
erational reliability of the vehicle.
In some cases scopes and intervals may vary
according to the country-specific version. Re‐
placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐
cants and wear materials are calculated sepa‐
rately. Further information is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Condition Based Service
CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
count the driving conditions of your vehicle.
Based on this, Condition Based Service recog‐
nizes the maintenance requirements.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance corresponding to your
user profile.
Detailed information on service requirements,
refer to page 85, can be displayed on the Con‐
trol Display.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the remote control. The
dealer’s service center can read this data out
and suggest an optimized maintenance scope
for your vehicle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
control with which the vehicle was driven most
recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop
update the time-dependent maintenance pro‐
cedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if
necessary, changing the engine oil and the mi‐
crofilter/activated-charcoal filter.
Service and Warranty In‐
formation Booklet for
US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Book‐
let for Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
for additional information on service require‐
ments.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that maintenance and repair be performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
Seite 201
Maintenance
MOBILITY
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
service center or repair shop. Records of regu‐
lar maintenance and repair work should be re‐
tained.
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
Information
CAUTION
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an
intricate component intended to be used in
conjunction with specialized equipment to
check the vehicle’s primary emissions system.
Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diag‐
nosis, or contact with the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis for other than its intended purpose,
can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates
risks of personal and property damage. Given
the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the socket
for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop or other persons that have
the specialized training and equipment for pur‐
poses of properly utilizing the socket for On‐
board Diagnosis.◀
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as pos‐
sible.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive misfir‐
ing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
tem checked immediately; otherwise, seri‐
ous engine misfiring within a brief period
can seriously damage emission control
components, in particular the catalytic con‐
verter.
Seite 202
MOBILITY
Maintenance
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Replacing components
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐
tive features and systems.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located under
the cargo floor panel.
Wiper blade replacement
Information
CAUTION
If the wiper arm falls onto the windshield
without the wiper blades installed, the wind‐
shield can be damaged. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Secure the wiper arm when re‐
placing the wiper blades and do not fold down
the wipers without the wiper blades installed.◀
CAUTION
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Make sure that the wipers with
the wiper blades mounted are folded down
onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
Replacing the front wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer
to page 73, the wiper arms.
2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
3. Press button, arrow 1, and pull out the
wiper blade, arrow 2.
4. Insert and latch a new wiper blade in re‐
verse order.
5. Fold down the wipers.
Replace rear wiper blades
1.
Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
2. Turn the wiper blade all the way back.
Seite 203
Replacing components
MOBILITY
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
3. Continue turning the wiper blade all the
way so that it pops out of the holder.
4. Press the new wiper blade into the holder
until you hear it snap into place.
5. Fold the wipers in.
Lamp and bulb replace‐
ment
General information
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution
to vehicle safety.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you have appropriate work performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop if you are unfami‐
liar with it or if it has not been described here.
A spare lamp box is available from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Information
Lights and bulbs
WARNING
Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con‐
tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is
risk of injuries. Only change bulbs after they
have cooled off.◀
WARNING
Work on switched-on lighting systems
can cause short circuits. There is risk of injuries
or risk of property damage. When working on
the lighting system, switch off the lamps in
question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufac‐
turer's instructions.◀
CAUTION
Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life.
There is risk of property damage. Do not hold
new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a clean
cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by
its base.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Some items of equipment use light-emitting di‐
odes installed behind a cover as a light source.
These light-emitting diodes, which are related
to conventional lasers, are officially designated
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
WARNING
Too intensive brightness can irritate or
damage the retina of the eye. There is risk of
injuries. Do not look directly into the headlights
or other light sources. Do not remove the LED
covers.◀
Headlight glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When
driving with the lights switched on, the conden‐
sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐
light glass does not need to be changed.
If despite driving with the lights switched on,
increasing humidity forms, e. g. water droplets
in the lamp, the manufacturer of your vehicle
recommends having it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Seite 204
MOBILITY
Replacing components
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Front lights, bulb replacement
Overview
Halogen headlights
1 Low beams/high beams
2 Turn signal
LED headlights
1 Daytime running lights
2 Low beams/high beams
3 Turn signal
Bug light
1 Parking lights
2 Daytime running lights
3 Fog lights
LED bug light
1 Parking lights
2 Fog lights
LED low beams/LED high beams
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 204.
The lights feature LED technology. In the case
of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Halogen low beams/halogen high
beams
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 204.
Seite 205
Replacing components
MOBILITY
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Bulbs: H4
1. Open the hood, refer to page 194.
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow, and
remove.
3. Pull off the connector.
4. Unclip spring clip, arrow, and fold down.
5. Remove the bulb from the headlight hous‐
ing.
6. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in
the reverse order.
Turn signal
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 204.
Bulbs: PW24W
With white turn signal lights: PWY24W
1. Turn the steering wheel.
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow 1, and
remove.
3. Unscrew the inner lid counterclockwise,
and remove it.
4. Pull bulb holder out of the bulb housing; if
needed, loosen it with small tilting move‐
ments if possible.
5. Pull the bulb out of the fixture.
6. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in
the reverse order.
Seite 206
MOBILITY
Replacing components
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
LED parking lights/LED fog lights
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 204.
The lights feature LED technology. In the case
of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Parking lights/fog lights/daytime
running lights
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 204.
Bulbs:
▷ Parking lights for halogen headlights: W5W
Parking lights for LED headlights: W5W NBV
▷ Daytime running light: PSX24W
▷ Fog lamp: H8
Replacing the bulbs
1.
Turn the steering wheel.
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow 2, and
remove.
3. Remove the corresponding connector.
4. Remove the bulb holder.
▷ Turn the parking light bulb holder coun‐
ter-clockwise, arrow 1, and remove.
▷ Press together the upper and lower
locking of the daytime running lights
bulb holder, arrow 2, and remove the
bulb holder.
For better accessibility, if needed, re‐
move the bulb of the fog lamp before‐
hand.
▷ Turn the fog light bulb holder counter-
clockwise, arrow 3, and remove.
5. Pull the bulb out of the fixture.
6. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in
the reverse order.
The daytime running lights bulb holder en‐
gages audibly, first below, then above.
Tail lamps, bulb replacement
Overview
1 Tail lamps in split doors
2 Tail lamps in bumpers
3 License plate lamp
4 Center brake lamp
Seite 207
Replacing components
MOBILITY
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Tail lamps in split doors
1 Turn signal
2 Tail lamps
3 Rear fog lamp
4 Reversing lights
LED tail lights in the split doors
1 Turn signal
2 Tail lamps
3 Rear fog lamp
4 Reversing lights
Tail lamps in bumpers
1 Tail lamps/brake lights
2 Turn signal
In addition, the tail lamps in the bumper as‐
sume the functions of tail lamp and turn sig‐
nals, if the split doors are open.
Tail lamps in split doors
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 204.
Turn signals/tail lamps
Bulbs: P21W/W5W
1.
Opening split doors, refer to page 41.
2. Remove left or right cover. If necessary, it is
then possible to pry the cover off using a
screwdriver or a similar plastic tool.
3. Press the latches together upward, arrow 1,
and remove the bulb holder.
Seite 208
MOBILITY
Replacing components
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Loosen the plug connector, arrow 2, on the
bulb holder.
4. Remove the bulb holder from the opening.
5. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the
socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
▷ Arrow 1: turn signal
▷ Arrow 2: tail lamp
6. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the
new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make
sure that the bulb holder engages in all fas‐
teners.
Rear fog lights/reversing lights/tail lamps
Bulbs: P21W/W5W
1. Opening split doors, refer to page 41.
2. Remove left or right cover.
3. Press the latches together in the direction
of the arrow, arrow 1, and remove the bulb
holder.
Loosen the plug connector, arrow 2, on the
bulb holder.
4. Remove the bulb holder from the opening.
5. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the
socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
▷ Arrow 1: tail lamp
▷ Arrow 2: rear fog lamps
Seite 209
Replacing components
MOBILITY
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
▷ Arrow 3: reversing light
6. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the
new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make
sure that the bulb holder engages in all fas‐
teners.
Tail lamps in bumpers
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 204.
Brake lights/turn signals
Bulbs: P21W
1.
Press out cover below the tail lamp.
2. Remove the screwdriver from the onboard
vehicle tool kit.
3. Pull the screwdriver blade from the handle
and place it on the recessed-head screw
head in the bumper.
4. Attach the screw driver handle with the slot
to the blade, arrow 1.
5. Loosen screw in the bumper, arrow 2.
6. Pull tail lamp from the bumper.
Seite 210
MOBILITY
Replacing components
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
7. Turn the bulb holder counter-clockwise and
remove nonworking bulb.
8. To insert the new bulb and install the tail
lamp, proceed in reverse order of removal.
Make sure that the bulb holder sits tight in
the tail lamp.
Central brake lamp and license plate
lamp
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 204.
The lights feature LED technology. In the case
of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Side turn signal, bulb replacement
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 204.
Bulbs:
▷ With orange lens: W5W
▷ With white lens: WY5W
1. Open the hood. The covers of the side turn
signal lights are on the left and right next to
the hinges of the hood.
2. Loosen nuts of the cover by hand and re‐
move the cover.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and
remove.
4. Replace the bulb.
5. To insert the new bulb, proceed in reverse
order of removal. Insert the nuts of the
cover and press down.
Seite 211
Replacing components
MOBILITY
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Changing wheels/tires
Information
When using run-flat tires or tire sealants, a tire
does not need to be changed immediately in
the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire.
Which is why no spare tire is available.
The tools for changing wheels are available as
accessories from your dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated at the positions shown.
Emergency wheel
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Set the parking brake and engage lever in
position P P.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or
portable hazard warning lamp at an appro‐
priate distance.
▷ Perform wheel change only on a flat, solid
and slip-resistant surface. On soft or slip‐
pery ground, for example, snow, ice, tiles,
etc., the vehicle or vehicle jack can slip
away to the side.
▷ Do not place wood blocks or similar items
under the vehicle jack; otherwise, it cannot
reach its carrying capacity because of the
restricted height.
▷ If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the
vehicle and do not start the engine; other‐
wise, a fatal hazard exists.
Information
WARNING
The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting
the vehicle and for the jacking points on the ve‐
hicle only. There is risk of injuries. Do not lift
any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle
jack.◀
Removing the emergency wheel
The emergency wheel and the tools are located
in the cargo area under the cargo floor panel.
1.
Unscrew the wing nut.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Remove tool holder.
4. Slide the emergency wheel to the left and
remove it.
Prepare wheel change
1.
Follow the Safety instructions, refer to
page 212.
2. With the wheel chock from the onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit, also secure the vehicle against
rolling away at the front wheel of the oppo‐
Seite 212
MOBILITY
Replacing components
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
site side. For this, place the wheel chock
behind the front wheel diagonally across.
3. Loosen the wheel lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking up the vehicle
1. Place the vehicle jack at the jacking point
closest to the wheel such that the vehicle
jack foot is vertically beneath the vehicle
jacking point with the entire surface on the
ground.
2. Insert the vehicle jack head in the rectan‐
gular recess of the jacking point for crank‐
ing it up.
3. Crank it up until the wheel in question lifts
off of the ground.
Wheel mounting
Mount one emergency wheel only.
1.
Unscrew the wheel lug bolts and remove
the wheel.
2. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two bolts.
If non-original MINI light-alloy wheels are
mounted, the accompanying lug bolts may
have to be used as well.
3. Screw in the remaining the lug bolts and
tighten all bolts well in a crosswise pattern.
4. Lower the vehicle and remove the vehicle
jack.
After the wheel change
1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight‐
ening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo
area.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored in
the emergency wheel bracket because of
its size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐
portunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 108.
Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer
to page 105.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Replace the damaged tires as soon as pos‐
sible.
Driving with emergency wheel
WARNING
The emergency wheel has particular di‐
mensions. When driving with an emergency
wheel, changed driving properties may occur at
higher speeds, for example reduced lane stabil‐
ity when braking, longer braking distance and
changed self-steering properties in the limit
area. There is risk of an accident. Drive moder‐
ately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free.
The added amount of acid is sufficient for the
service life of the battery.
More information about the battery can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 213
Replacing components
MOBILITY
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Battery replacement
CAUTION
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible
can damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle
functions. There is a risk of personal and prop‐
erty damage. Only vehicle batteries that are
compatible with your vehicle type should be in‐
stalled in your vehicle. Information on compati‐
ble vehicle batteries is available at your dealer’s
service center.◀
After a battery replacement, the manufacturer
of your vehicle recommends that the vehicle
battery be registered on the vehicle by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop to ensure that all
comfort features are fully available and that
any Check Control messages of these comfort
features are no longer displayed.
Charging the battery
General information
Make sure that the battery is always sufficiently
charged to guarantee that the battery remains
usable for its full service life.
The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
lowing cases:
▷ When making frequent short-distance
drives.
▷ If the vehicle is not used for more than a
month.
▷ Steptronic transmission: when parked for
long periods of time in selector lever posi‐
tion D, R or N.
Information
CAUTION
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is
risk of property damage. Only connect battery
chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting
aid terminals in the engine compartment.◀
Starting aid terminals
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
starting aid terminals, refer to page 217, in the
engine compartment with the engine off.
Power failure
After a power loss, some equipment needs to
be newly initialized or individual settings up‐
dated, for example:
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Navigation system: wait for the operability
of the navigation.
▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐
tions again.
▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system, refer to
page 49.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop or
take them to a collection point.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Information
WARNING
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
electrical lines and components. There is risk of
fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do
not replace a nonworking fuse with a substitute
of another color or amperage rating.◀
Seite 214
MOBILITY
Replacing components
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse
types and locations are stored in the fuse box in
the glove compartment.
In the glove compartment
Swing the cover down, arrow.
Seite 215
Replacing components
MOBILITY
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐
tive features and systems.
Hazard warning flash‐
ers
The button is located above the Control Dis‐
play.
Warning triangle
Depending on the equipment version, the
warning triangle is located in the cargo area or
under the cargo floor panel.
First-aid kit
The first-aid kit is located in the trunk.
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents reg‐
ularly and replace any expired items promptly.
Jump-starting
General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle and
two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with
fully insulated clamp handles.
Information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. There is risk of injuries or
danger to life. Do not touch any components
that are under voltage.◀
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
Preparation
CAUTION
In the case of body contact between the
two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during
jump-starting. There is risk of property damage.
Make sure that no body contact occurs.◀
1.
Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage
information can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Seite 216
MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Starting aid terminals
WARNING
If the jumper cables are connected in the
incorrect order, sparks formation can occur.
There is risk of injuries. Pay attention to the cor‐
rect order during connection.◀
The starting aid terminal in the engine com‐
partment acts as the battery's positive terminal.
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the
battery negative terminal.
Connecting the cables
1.
Pull off the lid of the starting aid terminal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting aid
terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting aid
terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
or body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
corresponding engine or body ground of
the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and
let it run for several minutes at an increased
idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before making another
attempt in order to allow the discharged
battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order.
Check the battery and recharge if needed.
Tow-starting and towing
Information
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
for example approach control warning with
light braking function. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off
prior to tow-starting/towing.◀
Switching off Intelligent Safety systems, refer to
page 110.
Seite 217
Breakdown assistance
MOBILITY
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Steptronic transmission: transporting
the vehicle
Information
The vehicle must not be towed if the front
wheels are touching the ground.
CAUTION
The vehicle can be damaged when tow‐
ing the vehicle with a lifted rear axle. There is
risk of property damage. Have vehicle trans‐
ported only with lifted front axle or on a load‐
ing platform.◀
Tow truck
Your vehicle should be transported with a tow
truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
CAUTION
When lifting the vehicle by the tow fitting
or body and chassis parts; damage can occur
on vehicle parts. There is risk of property dam‐
age. Lift vehicle using suitable means.◀
Use tow fitting located in the front only for po‐
sitioning the vehicle.
Pushing vehicle
To maneuver vehicle from the danger area,
manually unlock the transmission lock, refer to
page 77, if needed.
Manual transmission
Observe before towing your vehicle
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Towing
CAUTION
If manual unlocking of the parking brake
is not possible, the vehicle cannot be moved or
towed. There is risk of property damage. The
vehicle should only be transported on a loading
platform.◀
Information the following instructions:
▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on;
otherwise, the low beams, tail lamps, turn
signals, and wipers may be unavailable.
▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle
tilted, as the front wheels could turn.
▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no
power assist. Consequently, more force
needs to be applied when braking and
steering.
▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐
quired.
▷ The towing vehicle must not be lighter than
the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will
not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐
sponse.
▷ Do not exceed a towing speed of
30 mph/50 km/h.
▷ Do not exceed a towing distance of
30 miles/50 km.
Tow truck
Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
Seite 218
MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
CAUTION
When lifting the vehicle by the tow fitting
or body and chassis parts; damage can occur
on vehicle parts. There is risk of property dam‐
age. Lift vehicle using suitable means.◀
Towing other vehicles
Information
WARNING
If the approved gross vehicle weight of
the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to
be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will
not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐
sponse. There is risk of an accident! Make sure
that the gross vehicle weight of the towing ve‐
hicle is heavier than the vehicle to be towed.◀
CAUTION
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐
correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can oc‐
cur. There is risk of property damage. Correctly
attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fit‐
ting.◀
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐
pending on local regulations.
▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly
identify the vehicle being towed by placing
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐
dow.
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on
the vehicle components when towing, always
use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
CAUTION
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐
correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can oc‐
cur. There is risk of property damage. Correctly
attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fit‐
ting.◀
Tow fitting
General information
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or
rear of the vehicle.
The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit,
refer to page 203, are together in the cargo
area.
Information
CAUTION
If the tow fitting is not used as intended,
there can be damage to the vehicle or to the
tow fitting. There is risk of property damage.
Observe the notes on using the tow fitting.◀
Use of the tow fitting:
Seite 219
Breakdown assistance
MOBILITY
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
▷ Use tow fitting located in the front only for
positioning the vehicle.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for
example, do not lift the vehicle by the tow
fitting.
Screw thread for tow fitting
Threaded holes for the tow fitting are located in
the front and rear of the vehicle on the right
side with respect to the direction of travel.
Push out the cover by pressing on the top edge.
Tow-starting
Steptronic transmission
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to
the Steptronic transmission.
Have the cause of the starting problems fixed.
Manual transmission
If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but
start the engine by jump-starting, refer to
page 216. If the vehicle is equipped with a cat‐
alytic converter, only tow-start while the engine
is cold.
1.
Switch on the hazard warning system and
comply with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 64.
3. Engage third gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the
clutch pedal pressed and slowly release the
pedal. After the engine starts, immediately
press on the clutch pedal again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope, and switch off the hazard
warning system.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
Seite 220
MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Care
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐
tive features and systems.
Car washes
General information
Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves
in the area below the windshield when the
hood is raised.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in
winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐
age the vehicle.
Steam jets or high-pressure washers
Information
CAUTION
When cleaning with high-pressure wash‐
ers, components can be damaged due to the
pressure or temperatures being too high. There
is risk of property damage. Maintain sufficient
distance and do not spray too long continu‐
ously. Follow the Owner's Manual for the high-
pressure washer.◀
Distances and temperature
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
31.5 inches/80 cm.
Automatic car washes
Information
CAUTION
Improper use of automatic car washes
can cause damage to the vehicle. There is risk
of property damage. Information the following
instructions:
▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
▷ Avoid car washes with guide rails higher
than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to the
chassis.
▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to
avoid damage to tires and rims.
▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to
the exterior mirrors.
▷ Unscrew the rod antenna to avoid the rod
antenna breaking off.
▷ Deactivate rain sensor if necessary to avoid
damage to the wiper system.◀
In some cases, an unintentional alarm can be
triggered by the interior motion sensor of the
alarm system. Follow the instructions on avoid‐
ing an unintentional alarm, refer to page 45.
With front PDC: to reduce PDC false alarms,
switch off automatic PDC activation on obstacle
detection, for example in car washes, refer to
page 129.
Before driving into a car wash
In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a
car wash, take the following steps:
Seite 221
Care
MOBILITY
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Manual transmission:
1. Drive into the car wash.
2. Shift to neutral.
3. Switch the engine off.
4. Switch on the ignition.
Steptronic transmission:
1. Drive into the car wash.
2. Engage selector lever position N.
3. Make sure that the parking brake is re‐
leased.
4. Press the Start/Stop button to switch off the
engine.
In this way, the ignition remains switched
on, and two Check-Control messages are
displayed.
A signal sounds when you leave the vehicle
while in selector lever position N.
The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside
when in selector lever position N. A signal is
sounded when an attempt is made to lock the
vehicle.
To start the engine with manual transmission:
1.
Press on the clutch pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
To start the engine with Steptronic transmis‐
sion:
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Headlights
▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or
acidic cleansers.
▷ Soak areas that have been dirtied e. g.,
from insects, with shampoo and wash off
with water.
▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an
ice scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
can be reduced and corrosion of the brake
discs can occur.
Completely remove all residues on the win‐
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper
blade wear.
Vehicle care
Car care products
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
using care and cleaning products from MINI.
WARNING
Cleansers can contain substances that are
dangerous and harmful to your health. There is
risk of injuries. When cleaning the interior, open
the doors or windows. Only use products in‐
tended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the instruc‐
tions on the container.◀
Vehicle paint
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
quency and extent of your car care to these
influences.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
grease or bird droppings must be removed im‐
mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐
tered or discolored.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather often, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
Seite 222
MOBILITY
Care
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, clean leather and provide leather care
roughly every two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Suitable care products are available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Upholstery material care
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
If upholstery is very dirty, for example, with
beverage stains, use a soft sponge or micro‐
fiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐
terial vigorously.
CAUTION
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of
clothing can damage the seat covers. There is
risk of property damage. Ensure that any Vel‐
cro® fasteners are closed.◀
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐
turer's instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
can destroy the protective layer of adjacent
components, such as the brake disk.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
ularly when they have been exposed to road
salt.
Rubber components
Environmental influences can cause surface
soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. For
cleaning, use only water and suitable care
products, the manufacturer of your vehicle rec‐
ommends original MINI care products.
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
car care products in order to avoid damage or
noises.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
soft cloth.
Plastic components
These include:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
▷ Roofliner.
▷ Lamp lenses.
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
▷ Matt black spray-coated components.
▷ Painted parts in the interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Dampen cloth lightly with water.
Do not soak the roofliner.
CAUTION
Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents,
such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease re‐
movers, fuel, or such, can damage plastic parts.
There is risk of property damage. Clean with a
Seite 223
Care
MOBILITY
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
microfiber cloth. Dampen cloth lightly with wa‐
ter.◀
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
WARNING
Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety
belt webbing. Missing protective effect of the
safety belts. There is risk of injuries or danger to
life. Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning
the safety belts.◀
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
belts clipped into their buckles.
Do not allow the switchs to retract the safety
belts until they are dry.
Carpets and floor mats
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is risk of an accident. Stow objects in the
vehicle such that they are secured and cannot
enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats
that are suitable for the vehicle and can be
safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose
floor mats and do not layer several floor mats.
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for
the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are se‐
curely fastened again after they were removed,
for example for cleaning.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐
rior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.
Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth
moistened with a small amount of glass deter‐
gent.
Displays/Screens/Projection lenses
CAUTION
Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of
any kind can damage the surface of displays
and screens. There is risk of property damage.
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.◀
CAUTION
The surface of displays can be damaged
with improper cleaning. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Avoid pressure that is too high
and do not use any scratching materials.◀
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
For stubborn soiling on the projection lens of
the Head-up Display, dampen the microfiber
cloth with alcohol. Extending projection lens,
refer to page 94.
Long-term
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
three months, special measures must be taken.
Further information is available from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Seite 224
MOBILITY
Care
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Seite 225
Care
MOBILITY
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
FIND ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Technical data
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐
tive features and systems.
Information
The technical data and specifications in this
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values.
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this,
for example, due to the selected special equip‐
ment, country version or country-specific
measurement method. Detailed values can be
found in the approval documents, on labels on
the vehicle or can be obtained from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
The information in the vehicle documents al‐
ways has priority over the information in this
Owner's Manual.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the
model version, equipment or country-specific
measurement method.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, for example, a roof antenna,
roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate,
for example, due to the selected special equip‐
ment, tires, load and chassis version.
MINI CLUBMAN
Width with mirrors
inches/mm 79.6/2,022
Width without mirrors inches/mm 70.9/1,800
Height inches/mm 56.7/1,441
Length inches/mm 168.3/4,275
Wheelbase inches/mm 105.1/2,670
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 37.1/11.3
Seite 228
REFERENCE
Technical data
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Weights
MINI CLUBMAN
Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 4,230/1,919
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 4,275/1,939
Load lbs/kg 980/445
Approved front axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,150/975
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,200/998
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,170/984
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft 17.5-47.9
Canada: trunk capacity cu ft/l 9.8-33.2/278-941
MINI Cooper S CLUBMAN
Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 4,260/1,932
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 4,330/1,964
Load lbs/kg 925/420
Approved front axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,250/1,021
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,330/1,057
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,110/957
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft 17.5-47.9
Canada: trunk capacity cu ft/l 12.7-44.1/360-1,250
Seite 229
Technical data
REFERENCE
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve‐
hicle are listed here.
Updates made after the
editorial deadline
These chapters of the printed Owner's Manual
were updated after the editorial deadline.
▷ The right place for children: children always
in the rear, refer to page 60.
▷ Safety: brake force display, refer to
page 116.
Seite 231
Appendix
REFERENCE
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Seite 232
REFERENCE
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Seite 233
REFERENCE
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Seite 234
REFERENCE
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Seite 235
REFERENCE
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐
tem 117
Acceleration Assistant, see
Launch Control 77
Accessories and parts 8
ACC, see camera-based cruise
control 121
Activated-charcoal filter 144
Active Cruise Control, see
camera-based cruise con‐
trol 121
Additives, oil 197
Adjustments, seats/head re‐
straints 50
Adjustments, steering
wheel 59
After washing vehicle 222
Airbags 101
Airbags, indicator/warning
light 102
Air circulation, see Recircu‐
lated-air mode 140, 143
Air conditioner 139
Air, dehumidifying, see Cool‐
ing function 140, 142
Air distribution,
manual 140, 143
Air flow, air conditioner 140
Air flow, automatic climate
control 143
Air pressure, tires 182
Air vents, see Ventilation 144
Alarm system 44
Alarm triggering 44
Alarm, unintentional 45
All around the center con‐
sole 16
All around the roofliner 17
All around the steering
wheel 14
All-season tires, see Winter
tires 188
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitter 147
Alternative oil types 197
Antifreeze, washer fluid 73
Antilock Brake System,
ABS 117
Anti-slip control, see DSC 117
App, MINI Motorer’s Guide 6
Approved axle load 229
Arrival time 89
Ash tray 150
Assistance when driving
off 120
Assist system, see Intelligent
Safety 110
AUTO intensity 143
Automatic car wash 221
Automatic climate con‐
trol 141
Automatic Curb Monitor 58
Automatic deactivation, Front-
seat passenger airbags 103
Automatic headlight con‐
trol 97
Automatic locking 44
Automatic recirculated-air
control 143
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 75
AUTO program, automatic cli‐
mate control 142
AUTO program, intensity 143
Auto Start/Stop function 66
Average fuel consumption 89
Average speed 89
Axle loads, weights 229
B
Backrest curvature, see Lum‐
bar support 51, 52
Band-aids, see First-aid
kit 216
Battery replacement, vehicle
battery 214
Battery, vehicle 213
Being towed, see Tow-starting
and towing 217
Belts, safety belts 53
Beverage holder, cu‐
pholder 156
Bonus range, GREEN
Mode 171
Bottle holder, see Cu‐
pholder 156
Brake assistant 117
Brake discs, break-in 162
Brake pads, break-in 162
Braking, hints 163
Breakdown assistance 216
Break-in 162
Brightness of Control Dis‐
play 92
Bug light 205
Bulb replacement 204
Bulb replacement, front 205
Bulb replacement, rear 207
Bulb replacement, side 211
Bulbs and lights 204
Button, Start/Stop 64
Bypassing, see Jump-start‐
ing 216
C
California Proposition 65
Warning 8
Seite 236
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Camera-based cruise con‐
trol 121
Camera lenses, care 224
Camera, rearview cam‐
era 132
Can holder, see Cu‐
pholder 156
Car battery 213
Car care products 222
Care, displays 224
Care, vehicle 222
Cargo area 152
Cargo area, adapting size 157
Cargo area door, see split
doors 40
Cargo area, enlarging 153
Cargo area, storage compart‐
ments 157
Cargo cover 152
Cargo, securing 166
Cargo straps, securing
cargo 166
Car key, see Remote con‐
trol 34
Carpet, care 224
Car wash 221
Catalytic converter, see Hot
exhaust system 163
CBS Condition Based Serv‐
ice 201
Center armrest 156
Center console 16
Central instrument cluster,
LED ring 92
Central locking system 40
Central screen, refer to Control
Display 18
Changes, technical, refer to
Own Safety 7
Changing parts 203
Changing wheels 212
Changing wheels/tires 187
Chassis number, see vehicle
identification number 10
Check Control 80
Checking the oil level elec‐
tronically 195
Children, seating position 60
Children, transporting
safely 60
Child restraint fixing sys‐
tem 60
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 62
Child restraint fixing systems,
mounting 61
Child safety locks 63
Child seat, mounting 61
Child seats 60
Chrome parts, care 223
Cigarette lighter 150
Cleaning, displays 224
Climate control 139, 141
Clock 84
Closing/opening via door
lock 39
Closing/opening with remote
control 37
Clothes hooks 157
Coasting 172
Coasting with engine decou‐
pled, coasting 172
Coasting with idling en‐
gine 172
Combination switch, see Turn
signals 70
Combi switch, see wiper sys‐
tem 71
Comfort Access 41
Compartments in the
doors 156
Compass 148
Compressor 189
Condensation on win‐
dows 143
Condensation under the vehi‐
cle 164
Condition Based Service
CBS 201
Configuring driving pro‐
gram 120
Confirmation signal 44
Control Display 18
Control Display, settings 91
Controller 19
Control systems, driving stabil‐
ity 117
Convenient opening 38
Coolant 199
Cooling function 140, 142
Cooling, maximum 142
Cooling system 199
Cornering lamp 98
Corrosion on brake discs 164
Cosmetic mirror 150
Courtesy lamps during unlock‐
ing 37
Courtesy lamps with the vehi‐
cle locked 38
Cruise control 127
Cruise control, active 121
Cruising range 85
Cupholder 156
Current fuel consumption 85
D
Damage, tires 186
Damping control, dy‐
namic 119
Data, technical 228
Date 84
Daytime running lights 98
Defrosting, see defrosting the
windows 141
Defrosting, see Windows, de‐
frosting 143
Defrosting the windows 141
Dehumidifying, air 140, 142
Deleting personal data 24
Deletion of personal data 24
Destination distance 89
Digital clock 84
Digital compass 148
Dimensions 228
Dimmable exterior mirrors 58
Dimmable interior mirror 59
Seite 237
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Direction indicator, see Turn
signals 70
Display, electronic, instrument
cluster 80
Display, engine tempera‐
ture 89
Display lighting, see Instru‐
ment lighting 99
Displays 79
Displays, cleaning 224
Disposal, coolant 200
Disposal, vehicle battery 214
Distance control, see PDC 129
Distance to destination 89
Divided screen view, split
screen 23
Door lock, see Remote con‐
trol 34
Drive mode, GREEN
Mode 169
Drive-off assistant 120
Drive-off assistant, see
DSC 117
Driving Dynamics Control 119
Driving Excitement, SPORT 90
Driving instruction, GREEN
Mode 171
Driving instructions, break-
in 162
Driving mode 119
Driving notes, general 163
Driving stability control sys‐
tems 117
Driving style analysis 173
Driving tips 163
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 117
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol 118
Dynamic Damping Con‐
trol 119
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 117
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 118
E
Electronic displays, instrument
cluster 80
Electronic oil measure‐
ment 195
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, see DSC 117
Emergency detection, remote
control 35
Emergency release, fuel filler
flap 178
Emergency start function, en‐
gine start 35
Emergency wheel, compact
wheel, see Emergency
wheel 212
Energy Control 85
Engine, automatic Start/Stop
function 66
Engine, automatic switch-
off 66
Engine compartment 193
Engine compartment, working
in 193
Engine coolant 199
Engine idling when driving,
coasting 172
Engine oil 195
Engine oil, adding 196
Engine oil additives 197
Engine oil change 197
Engine oil filler neck 196
Engine oil types, alterna‐
tive 197
Engine oil types, suitable 197
Engine start during malfunc‐
tion 35
Engine start, jump-start‐
ing 216
Engine start, see Starting the
engine 65
Engine stop 65
Engine temperature, dis‐
play 89
Entering a car wash 221
Equipment, interior 146
Error displays, see Check Con‐
trol 80
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram, see DSC 117
Exchanging wheels/tires 187
Exhaust system 163
Exterior mirror, automatic
dimming feature 58
Exterior mirrors 57
External start 216
External temperature dis‐
play 84
External temperature warn‐
ing 84
Eyes for securing cargo 166
F
Failure message, see Check
Control 80
False alarm, see Unintentional
alarm 45
Fan, see Air flow 140, 143
Favorites buttons, onboard
monitor 24
Filler neck for engine oil 196
Fine wood, care 223
First-aid kit 216
Flat tire, changing wheels 212
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 108
Flat tire, repairing 188
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 104
Flat tire, warning
lamp 105, 108
Flooding 163
Floor carpet, care 224
Floor mats, care 224
Fogged up windows 141
Folding back rear seat back‐
rests 153
Fold-out position, windshield
wipers 73
Foot brake 163
Front airbags 101
Seite 238
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Front-end collision warning
with City Braking func‐
tion 111
Front fog lights 99
Front-seat passenger airbags,
automatic deactivation 103
Front-seat passenger airbags,
indicator lamp 103
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 108
Fuel 180
Fuel consumption, see Aver‐
age fuel consumption 89
Fuel filler flap 178
Fuel gauge 84
Fuel lid 178
Fuel quality 180
Fuel recommendation 180
Fuel, tank capacity 230
Fuse 214
G
Garage door opener, see Uni‐
versal Integrated Remote
Control 146
Gasoline 180
Gear change, Steptronic trans‐
mission 75
Gear shift indicator 86
General driving notes 163
Glare shield 150
Glass sunroof, refer to Panor‐
amic glass sunroof 47
Glove compartment 155
GREEN Mode 169
GREEN Mode, bonus
range 171
GREEN Mode driving style
analysis 173
GREEN Mode indicator 169
GREEN - program, driving dy‐
namics 119
GREEN tip 171
Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
proved 229
Ground clearance 164
H
Halogen headlights 205
Handbrake, see Parking
brake 68
Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
nating code 147
Hazard warning flashers 216
Head airbag 101
Headlight control, auto‐
matic 97
Headlight courtesy delay fea‐
ture 97
Headlight flasher 71
Headlight glass 204
Headlights, care 222
Head restraints 50
Head restraints, front 54
Head restraints, rear 55
Head-up Display 93
Head-up Display, standard
view 94
Heavy cargo, stowing 166
High-beam Assistant 98
High beams 71
High beams/low beams, see
High-beam Assistant 98
Hills 164
Hill start assistant, see Drive-
off assistant 120
Holder for beverages 156
Homepage 6
Hood 193
Horn 14
Hot exhaust system 163
HUD Head-up Display 93
Hydroplaning 163
I
Ice warning, see External tem‐
perature warning 84
Icy roads, see External tem‐
perature warning 84
Identification marks, tires 184
Identification number, see ve‐
hicle identification num‐
ber 10
Ignition key, see Remote con‐
trol 34
Ignition off 64
Ignition on 64
Illuminated ring, central in‐
strument cluster 92
Indication of a flat
tire 105, 108
Indicator lamp, see Check
Control 80
Individual air distribu‐
tion 140, 143
Individual settings, see Per‐
sonal Profile 36
Inflation pressure, tires 182
Inflation pressure warning,
tires 108
Info display, refer to On-Board
computer 88
Information 6
Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 105
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 108
Instrument cluster 79
Instrument cluster, electronic
displays 80
Instrument lighting 99
Integrated key 34
Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle 29
Intelligent Safety 110
Intensity, AUTO program 143
Interior equipment 146
Interior lights 99
Interior lights during unlock‐
ing 37
Interior lights with the vehicle
locked 38
Interior mirror, automatic
dimming feature 59
Interior mirror, manually dim‐
mable 59
Seite 239
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
239
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Interior motion sensor 45
Interior rearview mirror, com‐
pass 148
Internet site 6
Interval display, service re‐
quirements 85
Interval mode 72
J
Jacking points for the vehicle
jack 212
Joystick, Steptronic transmis‐
sion 75
Jump-starting 216
K
Key/remote control 34
Keyless Go, see Comfort Ac‐
cess 41
Key Memory, see Personal
Profile 36
Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐
mission 75
Knee airbag 102
L
Label on recommended
tires 187
Lamp replacement 204
Lamp replacement, front 205
Lamp replacement, rear 207
Lamp replacement, side 211
Language on Control Dis‐
play 92
Lashing eyes, securing
cargo 166
LATCH child restraint sys‐
tem 62
Launch Control 77
Leather, care 222
LED bug light 205
LED headlights 205
LED ring, central instrument
cluster 92
LEDs, light-emitting di‐
odes 204
Letters and numbers, enter‐
ing 25
Light 96
Light-alloy wheels, care 223
Light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 204
Lighter 150
Lighting 96
Lights and bulbs 204
Light switch 96
Load 166
Loading 165
Lock, door 39
Locking/unlocking via door
lock 39
Locking/unlocking with re‐
mote control 37
Locking, automatic 44
Locking, settings 43
Lock, power window 47
Locks, doors, and windows 63
Low beams 96
Low beams, automatic, see
High-beam Assistant 98
Lower back support 52
Lower back support, mechani‐
cal 51
Luggage rack, refer to Roof-
mounted luggage rack 166
Lumbar support 52
Lumbar support, mechani‐
cal 51
M
Maintenance 201
Maintenance require‐
ments 201
Maintenance, service require‐
ments 85
Maintenance system,
MINI 201
Make-up mirror 150
Malfunction displays, see
Check Control 80
Manual air distribu‐
tion 140, 143
Manual air flow 140, 143
Manual brake, see Parking
brake 68
Manual mode, transmis‐
sion 76
Manual operation, door
lock 39
Manual operation, exterior
mirrors 58
Manual operation, fuel filler
flap 178
Manual operation, Park Dis‐
tance Control PDC 130
Manual operation, rearview
camera 132
Manual transmission 74
Manufacturer of the MINI 7
Marking, run-flat tires 188
Master key, see Remote con‐
trol 34
Maximum cooling 142
Maximum speed, display 86
Maximum speed, winter
tires 188
Measurement, units of 92
Medical kit 216
Memory, seat, mirror 56
Menu in instrument cluster 88
Menus, refer to onboard mon‐
itor operating concept 20
Messages, see Check Con‐
trol 80
Microfilter 141, 144
MID - program, driving dy‐
namics 119
MINI Connected, refer to
Integrated Owner's Manual
MINI maintenance sys‐
tem 201
MINIMALISM Analyser 173
MINIMALISM info 172
Seite 240
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
MINI Motorer’s Guide app 6
Minimum tread, tires 186
Mirror memory 56
Mirrors 57
Mobile communication devi‐
ces in the vehicle 163
Mobility System 189
Mode, GREEN Mode 169
Modifications, technical, refer
to Own Safety 7
Moisture in headlight 204
Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐
play 18
Mounting of child restraint
systems 61
Multifunction steering wheel,
buttons 14
Multimedia, refer to
Integrated Owner's Manual
N
Navigation, refer to Integrated
Owner's Manual
Neck restraints, front, see
Head restraints 54
Neck restraints, rear, see
Head restraints 55
New wheels and tires 187
No-touch opening of the split
doors 42
O
OBD Onboard Diagnos‐
tics 202
Obstacle marking, rearview
camera 133
Octane rating, see Recom‐
mended fuel grade 180
Odometer 84
Office, refer to Integrated
Owner's Manual
Oil 195
Oil, adding 196
Oil additives 197
Oil change 197
Oil change interval, service re‐
quirements 85
Oil filler neck 196
Oil types, alternative 197
Oil types, suitable 197
Old batteries, disposal 214
On-board computer 88
On-board computer, refer to
On-board computer 88
Onboard Diagnostics
OBD 202
Onboard monitor 18
Onboard monitor operating
concept 18
Onboard vehicle tool kit 203
Opening/closing via door
lock 39
Opening/closing with remote
control 37
Open the split doors with no-
touch activation 42
Operating menus, onboard
monitor 18
Optional equipment, standard
equipment 7
Outside air, see Automatic re‐
circulated-air control 143
Own safety 7
P
Paint, vehicle 222
Panoramic glass sunroof 47
Parallel parking assistant 134
Park Distance Control
PDC 129
Parked-car ventilation 144
Parked vehicle, condensa‐
tion 164
Parking aid, see PDC 129
Parking assistant 134
Parking brake 68
Parking lights 96
Parts and accessories 8
Passenger side mirror, tilting
downward 58
Pathway lines, rearview cam‐
era 133
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 129
Performance Control 118
Personal Profile 36
Person warning with City light
braking function 114
Phone, refer to Integrated
Owner's Manual
Pinch protection system, glass
sunroof 48
Pinch protection system, win‐
dows 46
Plastic, care 223
PostCrash 116
Power failure 214
Power windows 46
Prescribed engine oil
types 197
Pressure, tire air pressure 182
Pressure warning, tires 108
Profile, see Personal Pro‐
file 36
Protective function, glass sun‐
roof 48
Protective function, win‐
dows 46
Push-and-turn switch, see
Controller 19
R
Radiator fluid 199
Radio-operated key, see Re‐
mote control 34
Radio ready state 64
Radio, refer to Integrated
Owner's Manual
Rain sensor 72
Rear fog lights 99
Rear lights 207
Rearview camera 132
Rearview mirror 57
Seite 241
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
241
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Rear window de‐
froster 141, 144
Recirculated-air filter 144
Recirculated-air
mode 140, 143
Recommended fuel
grade 180
Recommended tire
brands 187
Refueling 178
Remaining range 85
Remote control/key 34
Remote control, blocking 35
Remote control, malfunc‐
tion 39
Remote control, replacing the
battery 34
Remote control, univer‐
sal 146
Replacement fuse 214
Replacing parts 203
Replacing the battery, remote
control 34
Replacing wheels/tires 187
Reporting safety malfunc‐
tions 10
RES CNCL button, see camera-
based cruise control 121
RES CNCL button, see Cruise
control 127
Reserve warning, see
Range 85
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 105
Retaining straps, securing
cargo 166
Retreaded tires 187
Roadside parking lights 97
RON recommended fuel
grade 180
Roofliner 17
Roof load capacity 229
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 166
RSC Run Flat System Compo‐
nent, see Run-flat tires 188
Rubber components,
care 223
Run-flat tires 188
S
Safe braking 163
Safety belt reminder for driv‐
er's seat and front passenger
seat 54
Safety belts 53
Safety belts, care 224
Safety switch, windows 47
Safety systems, airbags 101
Saving fuel 168
Screen, refer to Control Dis‐
play 18
Screwdriver 203
Sealant 189
Seat and mirror memory 56
Seat belts, see Safety belts 53
Seat heating, front 52
Seating position for chil‐
dren 60
Seats 50
Selection list in instrument
cluster 88
Selector lever, Steptronic
transmission 75
Sensors, care 224
Service and warranty 8
Service requirements, Condi‐
tion Based Service CBS 201
Service requirements, dis‐
play 85
SET button, see camera-based
cruise control 121
SET button, see Cruise con‐
trol 127
Settings, locking/unlocking 43
Settings, mirrors 57
Settings on Control Display 91
Settings, storing for seat, mir‐
ror 56
Shift paddles on the steering
wheel 76
Side airbag 101
Signaling, horn 14
Signals when unlocking 44
Sitting safely 50
Size 228
Slide/tilt glass roof 47
Snow chains 192
Socket 150
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐
nostics 202
Spare fuse 214
Spare tire, see Emergency
wheel 212
Speed, average 89
Speed limit detection, on‐
board computer 89
Speed limiter, display 86
Speed Limit Information 86
Speed warning 91
Split Doors 40
Split doors via remote con‐
trol 38
Split screen 23
Sport displays 90
SPORT program, Dynamic
Driving Control 119
Sport program, transmis‐
sion 76
Stability control systems 117
Standard view, Head-up Dis‐
play 94
Start/stop, automatic func‐
tion 66
Start/Stop button 64
Start function during malfunc‐
tion 35
Starting the engine 65
Status control display,
tires 105
Status information, onboard
monitor 23
Status of Owner's Manual 7
Steering wheel, adjusting 59
Steptronic Sport transmission,
see Steptronic transmis‐
sion 75
Seite 242
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
242
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Steptronic transmission 75
Stopping the engine 65
Storage compartments 155
Storage, tires 188
Storing the vehicle 224
Suitable engine oil types 197
Summer tires, tread 186
Sun visor 150
Supplementary text mes‐
sages 83
Switch for Dynamic Driv‐
ing 119
Switch-on times, parked-car
ventilation 145
Switch, see Cockpit 14
Symbols 6
Symbols in the status field 23
T
Tachometer 84
Tailgate, see split doors 40
Tail lamps 207
Technical changes, refer to
Own Safety 7
Technical data 228
Temperature, air condi‐
tioner 140
Temperature, automatic cli‐
mate control 142
Temperature display for exter‐
nal temperature 84
Temperature, engine 89
Tempomat, see camera-based
cruise control 121
Terminal, starting aid 217
Text messages, supplemen‐
tary 83
Theft alarm system, see Alarm
system 44
Thigh support 52
Tilt alarm sensor 45
Time of arrival 89
Tire damage 186
Tire identification marks 184
Tire inflation pressure 182
Tire inflation pressure moni‐
tor, refer to FTM 108
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 104
Tires, changing 187
Tire sealant 189
Tires, everything on wheels
and tires 182
Tires, run-flat tires 188
Tire tread 186
Tone, refer to Integrated
Owner's Manual
Tools 203
Total vehicle weight 229
Touchpad 21
Towing 217
Tow-starting 217
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor 104
Traction control 118
TRACTION drive mode, driving
dynamics 118
Transmission lock, releasing
manually 77
Transmission, manual trans‐
mission 74
Transmission, see Steptronic
transmission 75
Transporting children
safely 60
Tread, tires 186
Triple turn signal activa‐
tion 70
Trip odometer 84
Trip onboard computer 90
Trip recorder, see Trip odome‐
ter 84
Turning circle lines, rearview
camera 133
Turn signal, front 205
Turn signal, side 211
Turn signals, operation 70
Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐
placement 207
U
Unintentional alarm 45
Units of measurement 92
Universal remote control 146
Unlock button, Steptronic
transmission 75
Unlocking/locking via door
lock 39
Unlocking/locking with re‐
mote control 37
Unlocking, settings 43
Updates made after the edito‐
rial deadline 7
Upholstery care 223
USB interface 151
V
Vanity mirror 150
Vehicle battery 213
Vehicle battery, replacing 214
Vehicle, break-in 162
Vehicle care 222
Vehicle features and op‐
tions 7
Vehicle identification num‐
ber 10
Vehicle jack 212
Vehicle paint 222
Vehicle storage 224
Vehicle wash 221
Ventilation 144
Ventilation, see Parked-car
ventilation 144
VIN, see vehicle identification
number 10
Voice activation system 26
W
Warning and indicator lamps,
see Check Control 80
Warning displays, see Check
Control 80
Seite 243
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
243
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
Warning messages, see Check
Control 80
Warning triangle 216
Warranty 7
Washer fluid 73
Washer nozzles, wind‐
shield 73
Washing, vehicle 221
Water on roads 163
Weights 229
Welcome lamps during un‐
locking 37
Welcome lights 97
Wheels, changing 187
Wheels, everything on wheels
and tires 182
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 108
Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 104
Window defroster,
rear 141, 144
Windows, powered 46
Windshield cleaning sys‐
tem 71
Windshield de‐
froster 141, 143
Windshield washer fluid 73
Windshield washer nozzles 73
Windshield wipers, fold-out
position 73
Windshield wipers, see wiper
system 71
Winter storage, care 224
Winter tires, suitable tires 188
Winter tires, tread 186
Wiper blades, replacing 203
Wiper fluid 73
Wiper system 71
Wood, care 223
Word match concept, naviga‐
tion 25
Wrench 203
Seite 244
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
244
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
01 40 2 964 571 ue
*BL2964571008*
DRIVE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 571 - X/15
